Samsung Electronics Co SMN900R4 Multi-band CDMA/LTE Phone with WLAN, Bluetooth, RFID and ANT+ User Manual i605 UM
Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Multi-band CDMA/LTE Phone with WLAN, Bluetooth, RFID and ANT+ i605 UM
Users Manual
GH68_XXXXXX Printed in Korea
ANDROID SMARTPHONE
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone and keep it for future reference.
SM-N900R4
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
DRAFT - Internal Use Only
Intellectual Property
All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers
relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating there to (the “Phone
System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, state laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual
Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software,
computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the
rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare
derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No
title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain
with SAMSUNG and its suppliers.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product, including but not limited to 'PowerTOP' and 'e2fsprogs', incorporate source code
covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and
other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open source licenses, please visit:
http://opensource.samsung.com
.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR
ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR
COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS
OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS. IF YOUR CARRIER PROHIBITS
THIS, IF YOU ATTEMPT TO DOWNLOAD SOFTWARE ONTO THE DEVICE WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION, YOU WILL BE NOTIFIED ON THE
SCREEN THAT THE PHONE WILL NO LONGER OPERATE AND BE INSTRUCTED TO POWER DOWN THE DEVICE. YOU MUST THEN
CONTACT YOUR CARRIER TO RESTORE THE DEVICE TO THE CARRIER-AUTHORIZED SETTINGS.
SAFE™ ("Samsung Approved For Enterprise"): TO THE FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD.,
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE
"SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ APPROVED DEVICES AND SAFE™ APPROVED APPLICATIONS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™
APPROVED DEVICES OR SAFE™ APPROVED APPLICATIONS. In addition, information technology security protection will be affected
by features or functionality associated with, among other things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private
network solutions selected by the software provider, solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and
virtual private network solution is at the sole discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
effect on information technology security protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user.
For complete statement of limited warranty, please refer to
www.samsung.com/us/safe
, available on the web and where Samsung
smartphone and Galaxy Tab™ devices are sold.
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC
©2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
www.samsung.com/us/support
Headquarters:
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, TX 75082
Customer Care Center:
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Internet Address:
http://www.samsung.com
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc.
microSD™, microSDHC™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX
videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in License settings under Settings > About
phone > Legal information. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your registration.
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
LTE is a trademark of ETSI.
Google, Google Play and other marks are trademarks of Google, Inc.
©Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC (“Samsung”). Samsung, Super AMOLED, and AllShare are all trademarks of
Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and/or its related entities. Other company names, product names and marks mentioned herein are
the property of their respective owners and may be trademarks or registered trademarks. Appearance of device may vary.
©Verizon Wireless. Verizon Wireless, the Verizon Wireless logos, and Convoy™ are trademarks of Verizon Trademark Services
LLC. All company names, trademarks, logos and copyrights not property of Verizon Wireless are the property of their respective
owners.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
1
Table of Contents
Section 1: Getting Started ...........................6
Understanding this User Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Setting Up Your device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Turning the Device On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Your Google Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Your Samsung Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TTY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Task Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Securing Your Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Section 2: Understanding Your Device .....17
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
S Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Multi Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
LED Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Primary Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Widgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Section 3: Contacts and Accounts ...........44
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Speed Dials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
2
Section 4: Calling ..................................... 57
Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Multi-party Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Ending a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Call Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Section 5: Messaging ............................... 69
Types of Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Text and Multimedia Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Emergency Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Google Talk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Section 6: Applications ............................ 80
Managing Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Action Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Amazon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Amazon Kindle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Amazon MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Appstore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Audible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Bloomberg+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Caller Name ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Chrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Evernote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Flipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Gallery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Gmail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Google . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Google Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Google + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Group Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hangouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
IMDb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
3
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
KNOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Messenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Mobile HotSpot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Using Playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Creating a Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Transferring Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Removing Music Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
My Verizon Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
PEN.UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Play Books . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Play Magazines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Play Movies & TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Play Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Play Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Downloading a New Google Application . . . . .112
Launching an Installed Google Application . . .114
POLARIS Office 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
S Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
S Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
S Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
S Voice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Samsung Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Samsung Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Samsung Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Scrapbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Setup Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
SketchBook for Galaxy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Slacker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Story Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
TripAdvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Verizon Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Viewdini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Voice Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
4
Voice Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
VZ Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
VZ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
WatchON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
YouTube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Section 7: Connections .......................... 139
Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Mobile Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
VPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tethering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
NFC and Beaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
S Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Nearby devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Connecting to a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Section 8: Settings ................................. 152
Accessing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Wireless and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
More Wireless and Network Settings . . . . . . 158
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
One-handed operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Language and input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Back up and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
S Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Accessibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
About phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Section 9: Health and Safety Information 207
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals . . 207
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
FCC Part 15 Information to User . . . . . . . . . . 214
Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS) . 214
Smart Practices While Driving . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Battery Use and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling . . . 218
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
5
UL Certified Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Display / Touch-Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Responsible Listening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . . 226
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
FCC Notice and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Other Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . 229
Section 10: Warranty Information ..........231
Standard Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
End User License Agreement for Software . . . 236
Index .........................................................244
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Getting Started 6
Section 1: Getting Started
Understanding this User Manual
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of
your device. A robust index for features begins on page 244.
Also included is important safety information beginning on
page 207, that you should know before using your device.
This manual gives navigation instructions according to the
default display settings. If you select other settings,
navigation steps may be different.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual
assume that you are starting from the Home screen. To get to
the Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For
more information, see “Securing Your Device” on page 16.
Note:
Instructions in this manual are based on default settings,
and may vary from your device, depending on the
software version on your device, and any changes to the
device’s Settings.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual
displays may vary, depending on the software version of
your device and any changes to the device’s Settings.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
7
Special Text
In this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the rest.
These are intended to point out important information, share
quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and
more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:
•
Notes
: Presents alternative options for the current feature or
menu.
•
Tips
: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
•
Important
: Points out important information about the current
feature that could affect performance.
•
Warning
: Brings to your attention important information to
prevent loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to
your device.
Text Conventions
This manual provides condensed information about how to
use your device. To make this possible, the following text
conventions are used to represent frequently-used steps:
➔
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in procedures. For
example:
“From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.”
Many settings use an On/Off switch. Touch the
On/Off switch to turn a setting On or Off. This
graphic is used to represent the On/Off switch.
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Getting Started 8
Setting Up Your device
Install the 4G LTE SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card,
battery, and optional memory card, then charge the battery
to begin using your device.
Back Cover
The battery, SIM card, and optional memory card are
installed under a removable cover on the back of the device.
Removing the battery cover
Pull up using the slot provided, while lifting the cover
off the device.
Installing the battery cover
Align the cover and press it firmly into place, making
sure it snaps into place.
Note:
The battery cover is flexible. Take care to avoid bending
or twisting the cover when removing and installing, to
prevent damage to the cover.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
9
SIM Card
Your device uses a 4G LTE SIM (Subscriber Identity Module).
The 4G LTE SIM is a small, rectangular plastic card that
stores your phone number, information about your wireless
service, and other information such as messages.
If you purchased your device at a Verizon Wireless store, the
SIM card is activated and ready to use. If you ordered a new
device, the card may need to be activated before you can use
it. For more information about activating the SIM card, visit:
http://www.verizonwireless.com/4GSIM
.
Caution!
Turn the device off before installing or removing the
SIM card. Do not bend or scratch the SIM card. Take
care when handling, installing, or removing the SIM
card, and avoid exposing the SIM card to static
electricity, water, or dirt. Keep the SIM card out of
reach of small children.
Installing the 4G LTE SIM Card
1. Remove the back cover.
2. With the Verizon Wireless logo facing up, carefully
insert the 4G LTE SIM Card into the slot, pressing gently
until it locks into place.
3. Install the back cover.
Removing the 4G LTE SIM Card
1. Turn off the device, then remove the back cover.
2. Press the 4G LTE SIM Card in gently to release the lock,
then carefully slide the 4G LTE SIM Card out of the slot.
3. Install the back cover.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Getting Started 10
Battery
Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion
battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable)
is included with the device, for charging the battery.
The battery comes partially charged. You must fully charge
the battery before using your device for the first time. A fully
discharged battery requires up to 4 hours of charge time.
After the first charge, you can use the device while charging.
Warning!
Use only Samsung-approved charging devices and
batteries. Samsung accessories are designed to
maximize battery life. Using other accessories may
invalidate your warranty and may cause damage.
Battery Indicator
The battery icon in the Status Bar shows battery power
level. Before the battery becomes too low to operate, the
battery icon flashes and a tone plays. If you continue using
the device without charging, the device will power off.
Tip:
Task Manager provides helpful information about
extending battery life. For more information, see “Task
Manager” on page 14.
Installing and Removing the Battery
Installing the battery
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Insert the battery into the device, aligning the gold
contacts on the battery with the gold contacts in the
device.
3. Replace the battery cover.
Removing the Battery
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Lift the battery up and out of the device, using the slot
provided.
3. Replace the battery cover.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
11
Charging the Battery
Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (charging head
and USB cable) to charge your device from any 110/220 VAC
outlet.
Note:
The battery comes partially charged. You must fully
charge the battery before using your device for the first
time. A fully discharged battery requires up to 4 hours of
charge time. After the first charge, you can use the
device while charging.
1. Insert the USB cable into the port.
2. Connect the USB cable to the charging head, then plug
the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.
3. When charging is complete, unplug the charging head
from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from
the device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Getting Started 12
Turning the Device On and Off
Turning the Device On
Press and hold the
Power/Lock
Key
until the
device vibrates and starts up.
Turning the Device Off
1. Press and hold the
Power/Lock
Key
until the
device vibrates and the Device Options menu displays.
2. At the prompt, tap
Power off
.
Your Google Account
Your new device uses your Google account to fully utilize its
Android features, including Gmail, Google Talk and the Play
Store. When you turn on your device for the first time, set up
a connection with your existing Google account, or create a
new Google account.
To create a Google account, or set up your Google account on
your device, use Accounts and sync settings (see “Accounts”
on page 193).
Your Samsung Account
Create a Samsung account, for access to Samsung apps on
your device, including Media Hub, Music Hub, and AllShare
Play. For more information, see “Accounts” on page 193.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
13
Setup Wizard
The first time you turn your device on, Setup Wizard will
guide you through the basics of setting up your device.
Follow the prompts to choose a default language, set up
accounts, choose location services, and learn more about
your device.
You can also use the Setup Wizard to quickly configure your
device at any time.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Setup Wizard
.
Help
Get information about using your device, including videos,
useful tips, and other information.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Help
.
Your Phone Number
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
About phone
➔
Status
.
Voice Mail
All unanswered calls to your device are sent to voicemail,
even if your device is turned off, so you’ll want to set up your
voicemail and personal greeting as soon as you activate your
device.
For more information, see “Voicemail” on page 78.
TTY Mode
Your device is TTY-compatible, allowing you to connect a TTY
device to the device’s headset jack. Before you can use your
device with a TTY device, you’ll need to enable TTY Mode.
For more information about enabling TTY mode, see “Call
Settings” on page 63.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Getting Started 14
Roaming
When you travel outside your home network’s coverage area,
your device can use roaming to acquire service on other
compatible digital networks. When roaming, the
Roaming
icon displays in the Status bar.
Tip:
You can set your device’s roaming behavior. For more
information, see “Mobile networks” on page 158.
During roaming, some services may not be available.
Depending on your coverage area and service plan, extra
charges may apply when making or receiving calls,
connecting to the Internet, or using data services. Contact
Verizon Wireless for more information about your coverage
area and service plan.
Task Manager
Your device can run apps simultaneously, with some apps
running in the background. Use Task Manager to see which
apps are running on your device, and to end running apps to
extend battery life. You can also uninstall apps from your
device and check memory usage.
1. From any unlocked screen, press and hold the
Home Key
, then select
Task manager
.
2. Touch the
Active applications
tab to view apps running
on your device. Touch
End
, or
End all
to close apps.
3. Touch the
Downloaded
tab to view information about
apps you’ve installed on your device. Touch
Uninstall
to
remove an app from your device.
4. Touch the
RAM
tab to display the amount of RAM
(Random Access Memory) in use. Touch
Clear memory
to clear processes to increase available RAM.
5. Touch the
Storage
tab for internal system storage and
SD card memory statistics.
6. Touch the
Help
tab to view information about managing
RAM, and tips for extending battery life.
Tip:
Touch and drag your finger on the tabs to scroll the tabs.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
15
Memory Card
Your device supports optional, removable, microSD™ or
microSDHC™ memory cards of up to 64GB capacity (not
included), for storage of music, pictures, and other files.
For more information about using memory cards, see
“Memory Card” on page 150.
Installing a Memory Card
1. Remove the back cover.
2. With the gold contacts facing down, slide the memory
card into the slot, pushing gently until it locks into
place.
3. Install the back cover.
Removing a Memory Card
Important!
To prevent damage to data stored on the memory
card, unmount the card before removing it from the
device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then touch
Settings
➔
Storage
➔
Unmount SD card
.
2. At the prompt, read the warning and select
OK
to
continue. Wait for
SD card safe to remove
to appear in
the Status bar and Notifications.
3. Remove the back cover.
4. Gently press on the memory card to release the lock,
then carefully pull the card out.
5. Install the back cover.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Getting Started 16
Securing Your Device
Use your device’s screen lock features to secure your device.
Note:
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
To set a personal screen lock, use the Screen lock option
under Security settings. For more information, see “Screen
lock” on page 177.
For other settings related to securing your device, see
“Security” on page 182.
Locking the Device
By default, the device locks automatically when the
screen times out.
– or –
Press the
Power/Lock Key
.
Tip:
When the device is locked, the Emergency call feature is
available on the lock screen, to allow you to make
emergency calls even while the device is locked.
Unlocking the Device
Unlock the device using one of the default unlock screens, or
use Screen lock options for increased security.
Press the
Power/Lock Key
, then touch and
drag your finger across the screen.
Tip:
Special notification icons display for missed calls or new
messages. Drag a missed call or message icon to view
the message or call log.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
17
Section 2: Understanding Your Device
Features
•
Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
•
Brilliant 4.99XX??” HD Super AMOLED
®
screen (1920 x 1080)
•
1.9XX?? gigahertz quad-core processor
•
Delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network
technology by using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access Plus
(HSPA+).
•
Android 4.3, Jelly Bean Platform
•
USB 3.0 connector for fast transfer speeds
•
Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see
www.samsungsmartswitch.com
•
Support for Air View
®
and Air Gestures
®
.
•
S Pen functionality
•
Wi-Fi
®
Capability
•
WatchON
®
– Rich TV experience with Infrared (IR) remote
•
Apps available to download from the Google Play™ Store and
Samsung Apps
•
Access Movies, TV Shows, Music, Games, and Books with
Samsung Hub™
•
Samsung Link™ to share your media content across connected
devices. Cloud connectivity is enabled via the use of an external
Web storage service
•
Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub
®
•
13 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital
zoom XX??
•
2 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat XX??
•
Share Shot picture sharing functionality, Camera sharing via
multi-connect Wi-Fi Direct connection
•
S-Beam file transfer technology
•
Bluetooth enabled
•
NFC-compatible
•
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)
•
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging and
Google Hangouts™
•
Corporate and Personal Email
•
Music Player with multitasking features
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 18
•
Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Play Books™ and Play
Magazines™
•
Assisted GPS (Google Navigation)
•
Webkit-based browser
•
Expandable memory slot - supports up to 64GB microSD
•
Mobile HotSpot and USB Tethering-capability
•
Video Chat via Google Hangouts
•
Google Play™ Music
•
Wi-Fi
®
Calling via the use of a micro SIM card
•
HD Video Player 1080p
– Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP43
– Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX
•
Video Player support for PIP (Picture in Picture) viewing
•
DivX Certified
®
to play DivX
®
video up to HD 720p, including
premium content
Front
FPO
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
19
1.
Indicator light
illuminates with a series of distinct
colors and flashing patterns to indicate different
notifications and statuses. Events include Charging,
Low battery, and Missed event:
•
Powering on -
blue
blinks/animates
•
Battery Charging -
red
remains on
•
Battery Fully Charged -
green
remains on.
•
Low Battery or Charging Error-
red
blinks/animates
•
Missed Notification (Call or Messaging) -
blue
blinks/animates
For more information, refer to “LED Indicator” on page
269.
2.
Light (RGB) Sensor
lets you use the ambient light level
to adjust the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor
decreases screen brightness in dim light.
•
In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the
device to increase the brightness and contrast for better
viewing.
•
In dim light conditions, the device decreases the screen
brightness to compensate.
3.
Menu key
displays a list of options available for the
current screen. From the Home screen it displays
Add apps and widgets, Create folder, Set wallpaper,
Edit page, Search, and Settings options.
4.
Home
key displays the Home screen when pressed.
Press and hold to display your recent apps, Task
manager, and Remove all option.
Double-press to activate S Voice.
5.
Microphones
are used during phone calls and allow
other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking
to them. There are two microphones on the device:
•
Bottom microphone: used during handset mode.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 20
•
Top microphone: used while an active call is in the
speakerphone mode and assists in noise cancellation
(2 microphone solution).
6.
USB Power/Accessory connector
allows you to connect
a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/
data cable.
7.
Back key
redisplays the previous screen or clears
entries.
8.
S Pen
provides a stylus that assists you in performing
different functions.
9.
Display
shows all the information needed to operate
your phone, such as the connection status, received
signal strength, phone battery level, and time.
10.
Front Facing Camera
allows you to take pictures while
facing the screen and allows you to video conference.
11.
Gestures Sensor
used to detect Air View and Air Gesture
motions.
12.
Proximity Sensor
detects how close an object is to the
surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect
when your face is pressed up against the screen, such
as during a phone call.
•
While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
13.
Receiver
allows you to hear the other caller.
Side
FPO
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
21
•
Volume
: From the Home screen, press to adjust master volume.
During calls or media playback, press
to adjust volume. Press to
mute the ringtone of an incoming call.
•
Power/Lock
: Press and hold to turn the device on or off, and to
access a device options menu. Press to lock the device, or to
wake the screen for unlocking.
Back
FPO
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 22
1.
Flash
is used to take photos in low-light conditions.
2.
External speaker
allows you to hear ringers, music, and
other sounds offered by your device.
3.
micro SIM Card Slot
(internal) Installation location for
SIM card.
4.
microSD Card Slot
(internal) allows you use a microSD
card to expand the memory of your device.
S Pen
Create and collaborate with S Pen.
Removing S Pen
S Pen stores inside your device, for convenient access.
Slide S Pen from your device using the notch on the
end of the S Pen.
S Pen Settings
Configure S Pen settings, including options for sounds and
for tracking S Pen when it’s not stored in your device.
For more information about S Pen, and to configure settings,
touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
, or see “S Pen” on
page 196.
FPO
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
23
Easy Clip
Instantly outline and crop images on the screen, in any
shape, to share or paste. You can edit the cropped content,
or personalize it with your own handwriting.
To use Easy Clip:
1. Press and hold the S Pen button, then draw around the
image you want to clip, making sure to close the
shape.
2. Tap the app you want to paste the image into, or if you
do nothing, the image is pasted to Clipboard.
Air View
Hover S Pen over the screen to preview content, or view
information about an item on the screen. For example:
•
Hover over an email in a list to preview the message before
opening it.
•
Hover over a photo album to preview the contents, or see a
picture enlarged.
•
Hover over the timeline during video playback to preview and
navigate to specific scenes.
•
In S Planner, hover over dates and events to see details
•
Hover over an icon or screen button to view the item’s title
For more information about Air View, and to configure
settings, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
➔
Air
View
, or see “Air view” on page 197.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 24
Quick Command
Multitask like never before. Launch Quick Command pad
from any screen, to hand-write tasks. Use S Pen to draw a
Quick Command to launch a feature, or draw a Quick
Command followed by a keyword to personalize the
command. For example, draw a question mark “?” to search
the Internet, or draw a question mark followed by a search
term to search on the term.
For more information about Quick Command, and to
configure settings, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
➔
Quick Command settings
, or see “Quick Command
settings” on page 197.
To launch Quick Command:
Press and hold the S Pen button and swipe upwards on
the screen.
Idea Sketch
Express your ideas with an image. Add illustrations by hand-
writing keywords on the Idea Sketch pad.
To use Idea Sketch:
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
S Note
.
2. From the toolbar, select the
Insert
tool, then choose
Idea Sketch
from the menu.
3. Write a search term for something you want to draw or
insert into your S Note. Or, select
List
and choose a
category.
4. S Note displays images matching your search term.
Select an image to insert it into your S Note. You can
edit the image, or draw on it, and changes are saved in
the note.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
25
Photo Notes
Hand-write a note on the back of pictures to add detail to
your memories.
To add a Photo Note:
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Gallery
.
2. Select a picture, then select
Menu
➔
Draw on image
.
3. Use S Pen to write a note on the back of the picture,
then select
Done
to save the note with the picture.
Note:
Photo notes are saved with the picture on your device,
but are not transferred when you share the picture.
Popup Note
Multitask with Popup Note - open an S Note instantly in a
popup window to jot down a quick note during a meeting, or
write down information from another area of the screen.
To use Popup Note:
1. From any screen, press and hold the S Pen button and
double-tap on the screen.
2. Use S Pen to write your note, then save it for later. You
can move the popup window around the screen.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 26
Popup Video
Multitask with Popup Video - transform your video player into
a popup window floating on the screen. The video will
continue to play, and the popup window can be resized or
moved anywhere on the screen.
To use Popup Video:
While watching a video, touch the
Popup Video
icon in the lower right corner of the screen.
Popup Browser
Multitask with Popup Browser - Launch a new, floating
browser window by selecting a web link from any
application.
To launch Popup Browser:
In any app, touch a web link, then choose
Popup
Browser
from the menu.
Other S Pen gestures
You can perform other functions with S Pen, for example:
•
Go back
: Press and hold the S Pen button, then draw on the
screen.
•
Open menu
: Press and hold the S Pen button, then draw
on the screen.
•
Screen capture
: Press and hold the S Pen button, then touch and
hold S Pen on the screen.
•
Select text
: Press and hold the S Pen button, then touch and drag
S Pen over the text to select
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
27
Home Screen
The Home screen is the starting point for using your device.
•
Status Bar
: Presents icons to show network status, battery
power, and connection details. For a list of icons, see
“Status
Bar”
on page 35.
•
Shortcuts
: Shortcuts to apps.These shortcuts are found on the
Home screen by default, and you can add more shortcuts to your
favorite apps. For more information, see
“Shortcuts”
on
page 38.
•
Widgets
: Apps that run on the Home screen. These widgets are
found on the Home screen by default, and you can add your
favorites. For more information, see
“Widgets”
on page 38.
Note:
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual
displays may vary, depending on the software version of
your device and any changes to the device’s Settings.
FPO
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 28
Extended Home Screen
The Home screen consists of the Home panel, plus panels
that extend beyond the display width to provide more space
for adding shortcuts, widgets and folders.
Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to scroll to
the left or right side panels. As you scroll, the indicator at the
bottom of the display shows your current position.
Customizing the Home Screen
Customize the Home screen to suit your preferences.
•
Add App Shortcuts
: For more information, see
“Shortcuts”
on
page 38.
•
Add Widgets
: For more information, see
“Widgets”
on page 38.
•
Add Folders
: For more information, see
“Folders”
on page 39.
•
Change the Wallpaper
: For more information, see
“Wallpaper”
on page 39.
•
Display settings
: For more information, see
“Display”
on
page 168.
Adding and removing Home screen panels
Your device comes with 6 Home screen panels. You can
customize the Home screen to include up to the seven
default panels.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
➔
Edit page
.
2. Slide your finger across the screen to scroll the panels,
and use these controls to configure panels:
Tip:
You can also “pinch” the Home screen to display Edit
options.
Remove
: Touch and hold on a panel, then drag it
to
Remove
.
Add
: Touch a previously-removed panel to add it,
up to the default total of seven.
Set as Home
: The panel set as Home will display
when you press the
Home Key
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
29
Navigation
Navigate your device’s features using the command keys and
the touch screen.
Warning!
Please note that a touch screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-
metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic
object when pressing on the touch screen may
damage the tempered glass surface and void the
warranty. For more information, see “Warranty
Information” on page 231.
Context-sensitive Menus
While using your device, context-sensitive menus offer
options for the feature or screen.
To access context-sensitive menus:
•
Touch
Menu
.
•
Touch and hold on an item.
Finger Gestures
Touch
Touch items to select or launch them. For example:
•
Touch the onscreen keyboard to enter characters or text.
•
Touch an item to select it.
•
Touch an app’s icon to launch the application.
Touch and Hold
Activate items by a touch and hold gesture. For example:
•
Touch and hold a widget on the Home screen to move it.
•
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.
Swipe
Swipe your finger across the screen. For example:
•
Unlocking the screen
•
Scrolling the Home screen or a menu
•
Combine touch and hold with swipe to drag an item.
Pinch
Using two fingers, make a pinch motion on the screen. For
example:
•
Pinch in to zoom in on pictures or screens.
•
Pinch out to zoom out on pictures or screens.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 30
Hand Gestures
Your device recognizes motion, to allow you to navigate and
access features by moving the device in specific gestures.
To use gestures, enable the Motion settings. For more
information, see “Motion” on page 194.
Pick Up or Turn Over
Lift the device, or place the device screen-down, on a
horizontal surface, such as a table.
•
Direct call
: When this setting is On, you can lift the device to your
ear to call a displayed contact in Messaging, Contacts, or Recent
calls to dial the contact’s device number.
•
Smart alert
: When this setting is On, the device will automatically
notify you to missed calls and alerts that occurred while the
device was stationary.
•
Turn over to mute/pause
: When this setting is On, turning the
device screen-down automatically mutes incoming call ringtones
and alerts sounds.
Tap to top
Tap on the top of the device twice, quickly.
•
Tap to top
: When this setting is On, a double tap on the top of the
device takes you to the top of a list.
Tilt
Touch and hold with your thumbs on the screen, then tilt the
device forward and back to zoom in or out.
•
Tilt to zoom
: When this setting is On, tilting the device while in
Gallery or Internet causes the screen to zoom in or out.
Pan
Touch and hold on the screen, then move the device in a
side-to-side motion.
•
Pan to move icon
: When this setting is On, moving the device in a
panning motion (side-to-side) moves a highlighted icon to a new
location on the Home screen.
•
Pan to browse images
: When this setting is On, moving the device
in a panning motion while viewing an image moves focus around
in the image.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
31
Shake
Shake your device to scan for nearby devices, such as
Bluetooth or Kies air devices, and more, for connecting to
your device for sharing files.
•
Shake to update
: When this setting is On, shaking the device
starts a scan for nearby devices for sharing.
Palm
Use your hand to swipe across the screen, or cover the
screen.
•
Palm swipe to capture
: When this setting is On, swiping the
screen with the side of your hand (left to right, or right to left)
captures a screen shot.
•
Palm touch to mute/pause
: When this setting is On, covering the
screen with your hand mutes or pauses media playback.
Multi Window
Multi Window allows you to use multiple apps on the same
screen, in multiple, resizable windows.
Enabling Multi Window
Enable Multi window on the Notifications screen.
1. Sweep your finger down from the top of the screen to
display Notifications.
2. Scroll the settings at the top of Notifications, then
touch
Multi window
to enable it.
Displaying Multi Window
When Multi window is enabled, the tab appears on the left
side of the screen by default. You can show or hide the tab.
Touch and hold the
Back Key
.
Moving the Multi Window Tab
When Multi window is enabled, its tab displays on the edge
of the screen where it’s docked. You can move the Multi
window tab up or down on the edge of the screen.
Touch and hold on the tab, then drag it up or down
along the edge of the screen.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 32
Moving Multi Window
By default, Multi window is docked on the left side of the
screen. You can dock the Multi window at any edge of the
screen (top, bottom, or either side).
Touch the tab to open Multi Window (the tab turns
gray), then drag Multi Window to another edge of the
screen.
Using Multi Window to Run Multiple Apps
You can launch apps from Multi window, or drag an app to
the screen to run multiple apps at the same time.
The apps display together on a split screen. You can switch
between the apps, or adjust the size of their display on the
screen.
Launching multiple apps
When you drag an app from Multi Window on top of an open
app, both apps display in a split window.
1. While using one app, touch the tab to display Multi
Window, then touch and drag an app to the screen.
2. As you drag the app over the screen, a blue screen
displays. Release the app when the blue screen
displays where you want to place the app.
Adjusting the size of app windows
You can adjust the size of the two apps on the screen.
Touch and drag the border between the windows.
Switching Multi window positions and making an
app full screen
You can switch the position of the app windows from top to
bottom.
Touch the border between the windows, then touch
Switch
.
Making an app full screen
You can change from the split window display to full screen.
Touch the border between the windows, then touch
Full screen
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
33
Notifications
Notifications shows information about connections, alerts
and other items.
1. Touch and drag downward from the top of the screen
to display notifications.
2. Touch an item to open the item, or to launch the related
app or feature.
World Clock
While displaying Notifications, touch the time in the Status
bar to display a World clock. Add cities to the clock to display
the time in different zones around the world.
Clearing Notifications
1. Sweep your finger downward from the top of the
screen to display Notifications.
2. Touch a notification to clear it, or touch
Clear
to clear all
notifications.
Settings
Use settings at the top of Notifications to control popular
settings. Slide your finger right and left to see all the icons.
•
Bluetooth
: Turn Bluetooth On or Off. See
“Bluetooth”
on
page 144.
•
GPS
: Turn Standalone GPS services on or off. See
“Standalone
GPS services”
on page 176.
•
Sound
: Switch between your sound settings, Mute (all sounds
silenced) and Vibrate (all sounds replaced by vibration).
•
Mobile data
: Activate or deactivate your device’s access to
mobile data service. See
“Mobile networks”
on page 158.
•
Screen rotation
: Enable or disable the Auto rotation setting, to
control whether the screen automatically updates when you
rotate the device. See
“Auto-rotate screen”
on page 170.
•
Airplane mode
: Turn Airplane mode On or Off. See
“Airplane
mode”
on page 152.
•
Power saving
: Enable or disable Power saving mode. See
“Power saving mode”
on page 173.
•
Driving mode
: Enable or disable Driving mode, to have incoming
caller ID and text messages read out. See
“Text-to-speech
output”
on page 191.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 34
•
AllShare Cast
: Enable or disable AllShare Cast, for easy sharing
with other devices.
•
Multi window
: Enable or disable the multi window feature. When
enabled, touching and holding on the Back Key activates the multi
window feature on the screen. Multi window gives you quick
access to apps from a window on the right side of the screen, and
you can drag an app from the multi window to run multiple apps
on the same screen.
LED Indicator
The LED indicator, on the front of the device above the screen
(see “Front” on page 18) animates or glows to show alerts or
device status.
Blue • Pulses in multi-color blue while the device is
turning On or Off.
• Blinks blue for a missed call, message or
other notification.
Red • Glows red when the device is connected to a
charger and charging.
• Blinks red when the device is connected to a
charger and there is a problem with charging.
• Blinks red when battery power is low (device
not connected to charger)
Green •
Glows green when the device is connected to a
charger and the battery is fully charged.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
35
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows network and battery status and other
details, including these common icons.
Airplane Mode Active
: All wireless
communications are disabled. See “Airplane
mode” on page 152.
USB Connected
: The device is connected to a
computer using a USB cable. For more information
about transferring data between your device and
a computer, see “Transferring Data” on page 149.
Voice Call
: A voice call is in progress.
Speakerphone
: Speakerphone is enabled.
Missed Call
: Displays when there is a missed call.
Mute
: Voice or playback volume is muted.
Battery Level
: Shown fully charged.
Battery Charging
: Battery is charging.
Device Power Critical
: Battery has very little power
remaining. Charge immediately.
GPS E911 Only
: E911 location is active (cannot be
turned off). See “E911” on page 175.
GPS Location Active
: One or more GPS location
services are active. See “Location services” on
page 175.
Missing SIM
: No SIM is installed.
No Network
: No wireless network is available.
3G connection
: device is active on a 3G system.
The arrows are colored when data is being
transferred.
4G LTE Connection
: device is active on a 4G LTE
system. The arrows are colored when data is
being transferred.
Signal Strength
: Current signal strength. The
greater the number of bars, the stronger the
signal.
Signal Strength Roaming, Open
: Current signal
strength, when the device is roaming. The greater
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 36
Signal Strength Roaming, CDMA
: Current signal
strength, when the device is roaming on CDMA
networks. The greater the number of bars, the
stronger the signal.
Wi-Fi Active
: Wi-Fi is active, and connected to a
Wi-Fi network. The greater the number of rays,
the stronger the signal. The arrows are colored
when data is being transferred. For more
information about configuring Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi”
on page 139.
Wi-Fi Action Needed
: Action needed to connect to
Wi-Fi network. For more information about
configuring Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on page 139.
New Message
: You have new message(s).
New Voicemail
: You have new voicemail. A
number indicates the number of new messages.
New Email Message
: You have new email.
Download Successful
: A file was downloaded
successfully.
Update Available
: An update is available for an
installed app.
Update Successful
: An update was installed for an
app.
Alarm
: An alarm is set.
Silent mode
: All sounds except media and alarms
are silenced, and Vibrate is not active.
Vibrate
: Vibrate Silent mode is active.
Music Playing
: Music is playing, but the app is in
the background. You can control playback from
Notifications, or from Music player.
Music Paused
: Music playback is paused. You can
control playback from Notifications, or from Music
player.
SD Card Ready
: A memory card scan is underway,
to prepare the card for use. For more information
about using memory cards, see “Memory Card”
on page 150.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
37
Primary Shortcuts
Primary Shortcuts appear at the bottom of the display. You
can edit the Primary Shortcuts, except for
Apps
.
Editing the Primary Shortcuts
To add or remove shortcuts:
Touch and hold a shortcut, then drag it from the
Primary Shortcuts to the Home screen, or from the
Home screen to the Primary Shortcuts.
To remove shortcuts:
Touch and hold the shortcut until
Remove
appears,
then drag the shortcut to the
Remove
icon.
SD Card Safe to Remove
: A memory card was
unmounted, and it is safe to uninstall it. For more
information about using memory cards, see
“Memory Card” on page 150.
SD Card Removed
: A memory card was
uninstalled. For more information about using
memory cards, see “Memory Card” on page 150.
Bluetooth Active
: Bluetooth is turned on. For more
information, see “Turning Bluetooth On or Off” on
page 144.
Bluetooth Paired
: Your device is paired with
another Bluetooth device. For more information,
see “Pairing with a Bluetooth Device” on
page 144.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 38
Widgets
Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place
on the Home screen for quick access.
Adding Widgets to the Home screen
Adding widgets from the Home screen
1. Navigate to a Home screen panel, then touch and hold
on the screen to display the
Home
screen
menu.
2. Touch
Apps and widgets
.
3. Touch the
Widgets
tab, then touch and hold and drag it
to the Home screen.
Adding Shortcuts from Widgets
1. Navigate to a Home screen panel.
2. Touch
Apps
, then touch the
Widgets
tab.
3. Touch a widget, then follow the prompts to configure
the widget and place it on the Home screen.
Removing Widgets
Touch and hold the widget until
Remove
appears,
then drag the widget to the Remove icon.
Shortcuts
Use App shortcuts for quick access to applications from the
Home screen. Your device comes with app shortcuts already
placed on the Home screen, and you can add your favorites.
Adding Shortcuts to the Home Screen
Adding shortcuts from the Home screen
1. Navigate to a Home screen panel, then touch and hold
on the screen to display the
Add to Home
screen
menu.
2. Touch
Apps and widgets
.
3. Touch and hold an app to add it to the Home screen.
Adding Shortcuts from Apps
1. Navigate to a Home screen panel.
2. Touch
Apps
.
3. Touch and hold an app to add it to the Home screen.
Removing Shortcuts
Touch and hold the shortcut until
Remove
appears,
then drag the shortcut to the Remove icon.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
39
Folders
Place folders on the Home screen to organize items.
Adding Folders
1. Navigate to a Home screen panel, then touch and hold
on the screen to display the
Home
screen
menu
2. Touch
Folder
. The folder displays on the Home screen.
Touch the folder to name it.
Removing Folders
Touch and hold the folder until
Remove
appears,
then drag the folder to the Remove icon.
Wallpaper
Choose a picture to display in the background of the Home
screen. You can choose pre-loaded wallpaper images, or
select a picture you’ve taken with Camera or downloaded.
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold on the screen
to display the
Home
screen
menu, then select
Set
wallpaper
.
2. Choose
Home screen
,
Lock screen
, or
Home and lock
screens
.
3. Choose a source:
• Gallery
: Choose a picture stored on your device or on an
optional installed memory card. Touch a picture to select it,
then use the crop tool to resize the picture, if desired. Touch
Done
to set the picture as wallpaper.
• Live wallpapers
: Choose from pre-loaded interactive moving
wallpapers. Touch a wallpaper, then touch
Set wallpaper
.
•Wallpaper
: Choose from pre-loaded wallpaper images. Touch
a wallpaper, then touch
Set wallpaper
.
Note:
You can also set Wallpaper in Settings. For more
information, see “Wallpaper” on page 168.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 40
Apps
Apps holds all applications installed on your device.
Applications that you download and install are also added to
Apps.
The Apps screen is like the Home screen, it consists of
panels that extend beyond the display width to provide more
space. Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to
scroll to the left or right side panels. As you scroll, the
indicator at the bottom of the display shows your current
position.
For more information about applications, see “Applications”
on page 80.
You can place shortcuts to apps on the Home screen, for
quick access to the app. For more information, see “Adding
Shortcuts from Apps” on page 38.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
.
2. Slide your finger left or right to scroll the Apps screens.
3. Touch an icon to launch the application.
Entering Text
Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keyboard for text entry.
Use the keyboard to enter letters, punctuation, numbers, and
other characters into text entry fields or applications. Access
the keyboard by touching any text entry field.
You can also use voice input to speak your inputs.
The virtual QWERTY keyboard displays at the bottom of the
screen. By default, when you rotate the device, the screen
orientation updates to display the keyboard at the bottom of
the screen.
Text Input Methods
Your device offers three text input methods: Google voice
typing, Samsung keyboard, and Swype.
You can set a default text entry method in Settings. For more
information, see “Keyboards and input methods” on
page 186.
To choose a text input method at any time:
While entering text, touch and drag downward from the
top of the screen to display Notifications, then touch
Choose input method
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
41
Using Samsung Keyboard
The Samsung keyboard is a custom virtual QWERTY
keyboard, featuring optional predictive text. Input characters
by tapping the on-screen keys with your finger, or use
speech recognition.
You can enable predictive text, to have the Samsung
keyboard match your key touches to common words and
displays them. Select a word from the display to insert it into
your text.
Configuring Samsung keyboard
Configure the Samsung keyboard to your preferences.
•
For more information, see
“Samsung keyboard”
on page 187.
•
While entering text, touch , then select from the pop-up
menu.
Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters
The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower
case alphabet letters by touching the Shift key to toggle the
case, before touching the letter key(s).
•
Touch once to switch from abc to Abc mode
•
Touch and hold to switch to ABC mode
Entering Symbols and Numbers
To enter common symbols, touch to switch to symbol
mode, then touch the corresponding key.
To enter less-common symbols, touch
➔
, then
touch the corresponding key.
To enter numbers, touch , then touch the number keys.
Using Google Voice Typing from the Samsung
keyboard
When you enable the Voice input setting for Samsung
keyboard, you can access Google Voice Typing from the
Samsung keyboard.
For more information about enabling Voice input, see
“Samsung keyboard” on page 187.
Touch , then speak your input.
Using Predictive text
When using Predictive text, you can have next-letter
prediction and regional error correction, which compensates
for pressing the wrong keys on the QWERTY keyboard.
While entering characters, potential word matches
display in the Predictive text area above the keyboard.
Touch a word to insert it into your text.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Understanding Your Device 42
Using Google Voice Typing
Use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice typing
feature.
1. While entering text, touch and drag downward from the
top of the screen to display Notifications, then touch
Select input method
➔
Google voice typing
.
2. At the
Listening
prompt, speak your text. As you speak,
the text is displayed in the text field.
Entering Text using Swype
Swype is a new way to enter text on touch screens. Instead
of touching each key individually, use your finger to trace
over the letters of a word. For each word, place your finger
on the first letter and glide to the subsequent letters, lifting
on the last letter.
Swype Help
While entering text, you can get information about Swype.
Touch and hold
Swype
to access Settings, for the
How to Swype
tutorial.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
43
Configuring Swype
Configure Swype options in the Language and input settings.
•
While entering text, touch and hold
Swype
.
•
For more information about Swype settings, see
“Swype”
on
page 189.
Using the Numeric Keyboard
Switch to a Numeric Keyboard, to quickly enter numbers and
mathematical operators.
Touch .
Entering Symbols and Numbers
Using the Swype Keyboard:
•
Touch and hold on a key to enter the character at the top of the
key.
•
Touch and hold on a key until a menu of all characters available
on that key appears, then touch a character to enter it.
•
Touch to switch to Symbol mode, then touch a key.
Editing Keyboard
The Editing Keyboard provides a quick way to move the
cursor and highlight text. If the application in which you are
working supports editing, you can cut, copy or paste
highlighted text.
Swype from
Swype
to .
Using Swype Voice Input
Enter text by speaking. Swype recognizes your speech and
enters text for you.
Touch
Voice Input
. At the prompt, speak the text
you want to enter.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 44
Section 3: Contacts and Accounts
Accounts
Your device provides the ability to synchronize information,
from a variety of accounts, including Email, Facebook,
Google, and your Samsung account. Depending on the
account, you can choose to synchronize your calendar,
contacts, and other types of content.
Contacts from your accounts appear in your device’s
Contacts.
With synchronization, you can ensure that information on
your device is updated with any information that changes in
your accounts.
Setting Up Your Accounts
Set up and manage your accounts with the Accounts
settings.
For information about setting up other, non-synchronized
email accounts, see “Setting Up Email Accounts” on
page 74.
Tip:
For more information on setting up your email, visit the
Smartphone Resource Center at:
https://smartphones.verizonwireless.com
Adding an account
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Add account
.
2. Select an account provider, then follow the prompts to
enter your credentials and sign in.
3. The device communicates with the provider’s server to
set up your account on the device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
45
Managing accounts
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
.
2. Select an account, then touch a setting to enable or
disable synchronization. When enabled, a check mark
appears in the check box.
Contacts
Use Contacts to store information for your friends, family and
colleagues, to make contacting them easy.
To access Contacts:
From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
Contact tips:
•
Swipe your finger left-to-right across a contact to make a call to
the contact.
•
Swipe right-to-left across a contact to create a message
addressed to the contact.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 46
Creating Contacts
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Create contact
.
2. At the
Save contact to
prompt, select a save option for
the contact (options depend on accounts set up):
• Phone
: Save to the phone’s Contacts.
• Google
: Save to your Google account.
•Corporate
: Save to your Corporate account.
3. Touch contact fields to enter information:
•
Touch
Photo ID
to choose a picture to identify the contact.
•
Touch
Name
to enter a name for the contact. Touch to
enter
Name prefix
,
First
name
,
Middle name
,
Last name,
or
Name suffix
.
•
Touch
Phone number
to enter a phone number, then touch the
Label
button to choose a label, from
Mobile
,
Home
,
Work
,
Work Fax
,
Home Fax
,
Pager
,
Other
,
Custom
or
Callback
. To
add another number, touch .
•
Touch
Email address
to enter an email address, then touch the
Label
button to choose a label, from
Home
,
Work
,
Other
, or
Custom
to create a new label. To add an address, touch .
•
Touch
Address
to enter an email address, then touch the
Label
button to choose a label, from
Home
,
Work
,
Other
, or
Custom
to create a new label. To add an address, touch .
•
Touch next to
Events
to enter a special date, then touch
the
Label
button to choose a label, from
Birthday
,
Anniversary
,
Other
, or
Custom
to create a new label.
•
Touch
Groups
to assign the contact to a group. For more
information about Groups, see
“Groups”
on page 53.
•
Touch
Ringtone
to choose a ringtone for the contact.
•
Touch
Vibration pattern
to choose a vibration pattern to play
along with the ringtone when this contact calls or sends you a
message.
•
Touch
Add another field
to add more fields, including
Phonetic Name
,
Organization
,
IM
,
Notes
,
Nickname
,
Website
, or
Relationship
.
4. When you finish entering information, touch
Save
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
47
Creating Contacts from Recent calls
Save a phone number from a recent call to create a new
contact, or update an existing contact.
For more information, see “Creating or Updating Contacts
Using Recent calls” on page 62.
Creating Contacts from the Phone Keypad
Enter a phone number with the Phone Keypad, then save it.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch the digits of the phone number on the
Keypad
.
3. Touch
Add to Contacts
, then select
Create contact
from
the pop-up menu.
4. Continue entering contact information. For more
information, see “Creating Contacts” on page 46.
Tip:
While entering a phone number, you can add waits or
pauses. Enter the number up to the pause or wait, then
touch
Menu
to select
Add 2 sec pause
or
Add wait
.
Updating Contacts
Make changes to update an existing contact.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch a contact to view its information, then touch
Edit
.
– or –
Touch and hold a contact, then select
Edit
from the
menu.
3. Continue entering contact information. For more
information, see “Creating Contacts” on page 46.
Updating Contacts from the Phone Keypad
Enter a phone number with the Phone Keypad, then save it.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch the digits of the phone number on the
Keypad
.
3. Touch
Add to Contacts
, then select
Update existing
from
the pop-up menu.
4. Select a contact to update, then continue entering
contact information. For more information, see
“Creating Contacts” on page 46.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 48
Updating Contacts from Recent calls
Save a phone number from a recent call to create a new
contact, or update an existing contact.
For more information, see “Creating or Updating Contacts
Using Recent calls” on page 62.
Choosing Contacts to Display
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Contacts to display
:
•
Choose
All contacts
to show all contacts.
•
Choose an account to only display contacts from that account.
•
Touch
Phone
to show only show contacts saved to the phone.
•
Touch
SIM
to show only contacts saved to the SIM card.
•
Choose
Customized list
to select contact types for each
account, or the phone.
Contacts Settings
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Settings
:
•
Select
Only contacts with phones
to show contacts with at
least one stored phone number.
•
Touch
List by
to sort contacts by first or last name.
•
Touch
Display contacts by
to list contacts by first or last name.
•
Touch
Service numbers
to view and call customer service for
your service provider.
•
Touch
Contact sharing settings
to set your preferences for
transferring contacts by Bluetooth. You can choose to send all
namecards at once, or individually. For more information about
sending contacts, see
“Sending Namecards (vCards)”
on
page 51.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
49
Other Contacts Options
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch a contact to display it, then touch
Menu
:
•History
: View calls and messages to and from this contact.
•Edit
: Modify contact information.
•Delete
: Erase the contact record.
• Join contact/Separate contact
: Manage multiple contacts as
one. For information, see
“Joining Contacts”
on page 50.
• Mark as default
: Set a default phone number or other field
(such as IM or email address). Defaults are the contact method
used when creating a message or calling a contact. You can
also set a default by touching and holding on a contact field.
• Share namecard via
: Send the namecard. For information,
see
“Sending Namecards (vCards)”
on page 51.
• Add to reject list
: Mark the contact so that calls or messages
from the contact are rejected automatically. To remove a
contact form the reject list, touch and hold on the contact in the
main contacts screen, then choose
Remove from reject list
.
• Print contact info
: Print the contact’s information via Bluetooth
to a compatible Samsung Bluetooth-enabled printer (not
included).
My Local Profile
My local profile is your own contact record, listed under ME
in Contacts. You can send My local profile as a vCard via
Bluetooth or as an attachment.
Creating My Local Profile
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Set up profile
, then enter your information
in the
contact fields.
For more information, see “Creating
Contacts” on page 46.
Sending My Local Profile
You can send your profile as a vCard via Bluetooth to other
Bluetooth devices, or as an attachment.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch your profile to display your contact information.
3. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Share namecard via
.
4. Choose a sending method, then follow the prompts to
send the profile.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 50
Joining Contacts
Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts,
including Google, Corporate, and other providers, plus social
networking sites like Facebook. When you synchronize
contacts from these accounts with your device, you may
have multiple contacts for one person.
Joining contact records allows you to see all the contact’s
numbers and addresses together. Joining also helps you
keep your contacts updated, because any changes to
information in the respective accounts is automatically
updated the next time you synchronize with the account.
Joining contacts
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch and hold on a contact, then select
Join contact
.
3. Select a contact to join to the selected contact.
Separating contacts
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch a contact to display its information.
3. Under the
Connection
heading, phone icons show how
many contacts are joined to this one. Touch the
Connection
field to display joined contacts.
4. Touch next to a contact to remove it from the
displayed contact.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
51
Exporting and Importing Contacts
You can export your contact list to and from USB storage
(your device’s memory), or an installed memory card.
Contacts are exported and imported as a special VCF file, and
contacts are sent as vCards.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Import/Export
.
3. Select an option, then follow the prompts to complete
the operation:
• Import from USB storage
: Copy contacts that are saved in
device memory.
• Export to USB storage
: Copy contacts to device memory.
• Import from SD card
: Copy contacts from an optional installed
memory card (not included).
• Export to SD card
: Copy contacts to an installed memory card.
• Import from SIM card
: Copy contacts that are saved to the
SIM card to device memory.
• Share namecard via
: Share contacts as vCards. For more
information, see
“Sending Namecards (vCards)”
on
page 51.
Sending Namecards (vCards)
You can send a contact namecard as a vCards via Bluetooth
to other Bluetooth devices, or as an attachment via Gmail or
Email.
Important!
Not all Bluetooth devices will accept contacts, and
not all devices support transfers of multiple
contacts. Check the target device’s documentation.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Import/Export
➔
Send
namecard via
.
3. Touch contacts to mark them for sending, or touch
Select all
to mark all contacts. A check mark appears in
the check box for marked contacts.
4. Touch
Done
. At the prompt, choose a sending method,
then follow the prompts to send the namecard:
• Bluetooth
: For more information about sending via Bluetooth,
see
“Bluetooth”
on page 144.
•Email
: For more information about sending email, see
“Email”
on page 74.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 52
•Gmail
: For more information about sending Gmail, see
“Composing and Sending Gmail”
on page 77.
• Messaging
: For more information about sending messages,
see
“Creating and Sending Messages”
on page 70.
• Wi-Fi Direct
: For more information about using Wi-Fi Direct,
see see
“Wi-Fi Direct”
on page 141.
Backing Up Contacts
Use Backup Assistant Plus to save a copy of your Contacts to
a secure web site.
For more information, see “Backup Assistant+” on page 72.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Backup
.
3. Follow the prompts to log in to your Backup Assistant
account.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
53
Favorites
Mark contacts with a
star to identify them as Favorites.
Favorites display on the Favorites tab in the Phone and
Contacts for fast dialing or messaging, and are indicated by
the .
Creating Favorites
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch and hold on a contact, then select
Add to
favorites
from the pop-up menu.
– or –
Touch a contact to display it, then touch at the top
right of the screen.
Groups
Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts
faster, or to quickly call or send messages to group
members. Your device comes with pre-loaded groups you
can use to add your contacts, or you can create new groups.
Accessing Groups
From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
Creating a New Group
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Create
, then enter information:
•
Touch
Group name
to enter a Group Name.
•
Touch
Group ringtone
to choose a ringtone for calls from
members of this group.
•
Touch
Vibration pattern
to choose a vibration to play for calls
from members of this group.
•
Touch
Add member
to select members from Contacts.
3. Touch to save the new group.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 54
Editing a Group
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Touch a Group to display it.
3. Touch
Menu
➔
Edit
, then update information for
the group. For more information, see “Creating a New
Group” on page 53.
Deleting a Group
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Delete
.
3. Touch a group to mark it for deletion, or touch
Select all
to mark all groups. When selected, a check mark
appears in the check box. You cannot delete pre-
loaded groups.
4. Touch
Delete
, then choose
Group only
or
Group
and
group members
.
Adding Contacts to a Group
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Touch a
Group
to display it, then touch
Add
member
.
3. Touch contact(s) to mark them for addition, or touch
Select all
to mark all contacts. When selected, a check
mark appears in the check box.
4. Touch
Done
to add the selected contact(s).
Removing Contacts from a Group
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Touch a
Group
to display it.
3. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Remove member
.
4. Touch contact(s) to mark them for removal, or touch
Select all
to mark all contacts. When selected, a check
mark appears in the check box.
5. Touch
Done
to remove the selected contact(s).
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
55
Sending a Message to Group Members
Create a new text or email message, addressed to the
group’s members.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
➔
Groups
.
2. Touch a
Group
to display it.
3. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Send message
or
Send
email
.
4. Touch contacts to mark them as recipients for the new
message, then touch
Done
.
5. The new message opens, with the marked contacts as
recipients. Continue creating the message, as desired.
For more information, see “Creating and Sending
Messages” on page 70, or see “Composing and
Sending Email” on page 76.
Speed Dials
Speed dials are 1-, 2-, or 3-digit shortcuts (1 to 100) you
assign to contacts, to allow you to quickly call the contact.
For more information about calling using speed dials, see
“Making Calls using Speed Dials” on page 57.
Note:
Some speed dials are reserved by default, and cannot
be assigned:
Speed dial 1 is reserved for Voicemail.
Speed dial 97 is reserved for balance inquiries.
Speed dial 98 is reserved for minutes inquiries.
Speed dial 99 is reserved for payment inquiries.
Speed dial 100 is reserved for data usage inquiries.
Assigning Speed Dials
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Speed dial setting
.
3. A list of speed dials displays.Touch a speed dial, then
touch a contact to assign the contact to the speed dial.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Contacts and Accounts 56
Removing or Reassigning a Speed Dial
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Speed dial setting
.
3. Touch
Menu
, then touch an option:
• Change order
: Touch an assigned speed dial, then touch a
new speed dial location to change the order.
•Remove
: Touch a speed dial to remove it.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
57
Section 4: Calling
Making Calls
Your device offers multiple ways to make calls:
•
Use the touch screen
Phone Keypad
to enter the phone number
or speed dial.
•
Call a contact from
Contacts
.
•
Call a contact from
Favorites
.
•
Return a call, or call a recent caller, from
Recent
calls.
•
Voice dial using
S Voice
.
Making Calls Using the Phone Keypad
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch the digits of the telephone number on the
Keypad
.
3. Touch to place the call.
Making Calls using Speed Dials
Speed Dials are 1-, 2-, or 3-digit shortcuts (1 to 100) you
assign to contacts, to allow you to quickly call the contact.
For more information about setting speed dials, see “Speed
Dials” on page 55.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch the digits of the speed dial number on the
Keypad
, holding the last digit until the number dials.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Calling 58
Making Calls from Contacts
A contact is an entry that you have created to store the
name, numbers, and other information for people or groups
of interest.
For more information, see “Contacts” on page 45.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Contacts
.
2. Find the contact and touch it to open the Contact entry.
3. Swipe your finger from left to right across the contact
to dial their default number.
– or –
Touch a contact, then touch to dial the
number.
Making Calls using S Voice
Place a call by speaking the name or number.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
. then touch
.
2. The first time you access, follow the prompts to
confirm the license agreement, and view information
about.
3. Follow the prompts to speak a command. You can say
commands such as:
• Call <Name >
: Call an entry in your Contacts list.
• Dial <Phone number>
: Call a spoken phone number.
•Redial
: Repeat a recent call.
Tip:
You can launch S Voice from most unlocked screens by
pressing the
Home Key
twice.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
59
Making Calls using Favorites
Favorites are contacts that you designate as favorites by
starring them. For more information about creating favorites,
see “Favorites” on page 53.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Favorites
to display favorites.
3. Find the contact and touch it to open the Contact entry.
4. Swipe your finger from left to right across the contact
to dial their default number.
– or –
Touch a contact, then touch to dial the
number.
Making Calls from Recent calls
Return a call, or call a number from a recent call stored in
Recent calls.
For more information, see “Recent Calls” on page 61.
Multi-party Calling
Use multi-party call features to set up a call between multiple
callers, such as for a conference call.
1. Establish the first call, by answering an incoming call
or making a call.
2. Touch
Add call
. The first call is placed on hold.
3. Make the second call by touching the phone number
digits, then press .
4. Touch
Merge
to merge the calls into one conference
call.
5. To end the call touch
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Calling 60
Answering Calls
You can answer incoming calls when the device is locked or
unlocked.
Touch and drag the
Answer
icon toward the
middle of the screen.
Tip:
To silence the ringtone for an incoming call, press the
Volume Key
.
Sending Calls to Voicemail
When your device alerts you to an incoming call, you can
reject the call to send the caller to voice mail, or reject the
call and send a message to the caller.
Rejecting a call
Touch and drag the
Reject
icon toward the middle
of the screen.
Rejecting a call with a message
Touch and drag
Reject call with message
toward the
middle of the screen, then select an existing message,
or
Create new message
.
Note:
For more information about creating reject messages,
see “Set reject messages” on page 64.
Answering Call-Waiting Calls
When you receive a call while on a call:
•
Touch and drag the
Answer
icon to answer the incoming
call. The original call is placed on hold, and remains on hold until
you end the second call, or swap calls back to the original call.
•
Touch
Swap
to place a call on hold and return to the original call.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
61
Options During a Call
While in a call, you can use these features:
•
Add call
: Display the Dialer to set up a multi-party call.
•
Keypad
: Display a keypad to enter numbers.
•
End call
: End the phone call.
•
Speaker
: Enable or disable speakerphone.
•
Mute
: Mute or unmute your voice on the call.
•
Headset
: Switch the call’s audio to a Bluetooth headset (device
and headset must already be paired; for more information see
“Pairing with a Bluetooth Device”
on page 144).
•
Touch
Menu
for options:
–
Contacts
: Launch Contacts.
–
Message
: Launch Messaging.
–
S Note
: Launch S Note.
–
Noise reduction on/Noise reduction off
: Enable or disable noise
reduction, to improve call audio quality in noisy environments.
–
My call sound
: Choose options for call audio, in cases where
you might need the sound softer or clear, or optimized for your
right or left ear.
Ending a Call
To end a call, touch .
Recent Calls
When you place, answer, or miss a call, a record of the call is
saved in Recent calls.
Accessing Recent calls
From the Home screen, touch
Phone
➔
Recent calls
.
Making Calls using Recent calls
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Recent
to display recent calls.
3. Swipe your finger from left to right across the call to
redial.
– or –
Touch a call, then touch to dial the number.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Calling 62
Sending Messages using Recent calls
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
➔
Recent calls
.
2. Swipe your finger from right to left across the call.
– or –
Touch a call, then touch to create a message to
the number.
Creating or Updating Contacts Using Recent
calls
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
➔
Recent calls
.
2. Touch and hold on a call, then select
Add to Contacts
from the pop-up menu.
3. Choose
Create contact
or
Update existing
.
4. Continue entering contact information. For more
information, see “Contacts” on page 45.
Managing Recent calls
Deleting records
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
➔
Recent calls
.
2. While viewing the calls, touch
Menu
, then touch
Delete
.
3. Touch call records to mark them for deletion, or touch
Select all
. A check indicates marked records.
4. Touch
Delete
to delete marked records.
Filtering records
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
➔
Recent calls
.
2. While viewing the calls, touch
Menu
, then touch
View by
.
3. Select a filter type, from
All calls and messages
,
All
calls
,
Missed calls
,
Dialed calls
,
Received calls
,
Rejected
calls
,
All messages
,
Sent messages
, and
Received
messages
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
63
Viewing call durations
View the length of the Last call, all Dialed calls, all Received
calls, or All calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
➔
Recent calls
.
2. While viewing calls, touch
Menu
, then touch
Call
duration
.
Call Settings
Configure settings for calling with your device.
Call restriction
Create and manage a list of phone numbers, to have your
device automatically reject calls you receive from those
numbers.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
.
3. Select
Call restriction
for these options:
• Auto reject mode
: Touch to turn Auto reject mode
ON
or
OFF
. When ON, calls from numbers on the Auto reject list
will be rejected.
• Auto reject list
: Enter telephone numbers to be rejected in
Auto reject mode is ON. Turn on
Unknown number
to reject
calls with no caller ID. Touch
Create
, then follow the prompts to
enter numbers to reject, or select them from Contacts. Touch
Match criteria
to set options for using the reject number list.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Calling 64
Set reject messages
Create and manage text messages to send to callers when
rejecting incoming calls. Messages you create here are
available from the incoming call screen when you use the
Reject with message option.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
Set reject messages
.
3. Manage messages:
•
To create new messages, touch
Create
, then follow the
prompts.
•
To modify an existing message, touch the message, then edit
the text.
Ringtones and keypad tones
Choose tones and/or vibration to play for incoming calls and
keypad touches.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
Ringtones and
keypad tones
.
3. Configure settings:
• Device ringtone
: Choose a default ringtone for incoming calls.
• Device vibration
: Choose a vibration pattern, or create your
own pattern, to play for incoming calls when Incoming call
vibration is turned On. Vibration plays along with the ringtone, if
Silent mode is not enabled.
• Incoming call vibration
: When enabled, the Device vibration
plays for incoming calls.
•Keytones
: When turned on, sounds play when you touch the
Phone keypad.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
65
Call alert
Set options for sounds and vibrations to occur during calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
Call alert
.
3. Configure options:
• Call vibrations
: Enable
Vibrate on connection to network
to
have your device vibrate when it connects to the network.
Enable on
Call-end vibration
to have the device vibrate when
the other caller ends the call.
•Call status tones
: Choose options for sounds to play during
calls. Enable
Call connect tone
to have the device play a tone
when the other caller answers a call. Enable
Minute minder
to
have a tone play once per minute during a call. Enable
Call end
tone
to have the device play a tone when the other caller ends
the call. Touch
OK
to save the settings.
• Alerts on call
: Enable to have notifications for alarms and new
messages play during phone calls. When disabled, these
notifications will be muted during a call.
Call answering/ending
Manage settings for answering and ending calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
Call answering/
ending
.
3. Configure these options:
• Answering key
: When enabled, you can answer an incoming
call by pressing the
Home Key
.
• The power key ends calls
: When enabled, pressing the
Power/Lock
Key
ends a call.
Auto screen off during calls
When enabled, the screen automatically turns off during
phone calls, and the proximity sensor on the front of the
device is used to turn the screen back on when the device is
moved or brought close to another surface, such as when
you move the device to your ear.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
.
3. Touch
Auto screen off during calls
to enable or disable
the option.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Calling 66
Accessory settings for call
Configure headset options for calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
Accessory settings
for call
.
3. Configure settings:
• Automatic answering
: When enabled, and you have a
headset connected to the Headset Jack, incoming calls are
answered automatically after a delay, set at Automatic
answering timer.
• Automatic answering timer
: Choose a time period to delay
before automatically answering an incoming call when
Automatic answering is enabled and a headset is connected to
the device.
• Outgoing call conditions
: When the device is paired with a
Bluetooth headset, you can choose to make calls even when
the device is locked.
My call sound
Choose options for call audio, in cases where you might need
the sound softer or more clear, or optimized for your right or
left ear. These are the defaults, but you can change them
during a call by touching
Menu
➔
My call sound
.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
My call sound
.
3. Configure options:
• My call sound settings
: Choose Off to use the phone’s
defaults, or choose Soft sound, Clear sound, Optimized for left
ear, or Optimized for right ear.
• Personalize call sound
: Follow the prompts to find the best
call sound for you.
Use extra volume for calls
When enabled, the call screen displays a volume control, for
adjusting call volume during calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
.
3. Touch
Use extra vol. for calls
to enable or disable the
option.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
67
Increase volume in pocket
When enabled, the device uses the proximity sensor to detect
when the device is in a pocket or other close-fitting location
such as a purse or bag, and increases the volume for
incoming call ringtones.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
.
3. Touch
Increase volume in pocket
to enable or disable
the option.
Additional settings
Enable or disable noise reduction. When enabled, the effect
of background noise is suppressed, to help you and the other
caller hear better.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
➔
Additional settings
.
3. Touch
Noise reduction
to enable or disable the option.
Voicemail
Configure options for voicemail.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
.
3. Configure options:
• Voicemail service
: By default, your device uses your wireless
service provider’s voicemail service. If you have another option
for voicemail installed, select it here.
• Voicemail settings
: By default, the speed dial for calling
voicemail for your service provider is *86 (*VM). If you wish to
use another speed dial, touch Voicemail number to set a new
one.
•Ringtone
: Choose a ringtone to play for a voicemail notification.
•Vibrate
: Choose an option for vibration to play for a voicemail
notification.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Calling 68
Other call settings
1. From the Home screen, touch
Phone
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Call Settings
.
3. Configure options:
• Current country
: Choose the country you are in. This is used in
Assisted dialing.
• Assisted dialing
: When turned On, your phone automatically
dials appropriate codes and prefixes for international calls.
Touch to turn the option On or Off, then touch
Assisted dialing to configure settings.
•Auto retry
: When enabled, the device will automatically redial a
call if it receives a busy signal from the network.
•TTY mode
: Choose a TTY mode to enable TTY mode, for use
with optional TTY equipment.
•DTMF tones
: Set the length of Dual-tone Multi-frequency
tones, which play when you use the keypad during a call, such
as when navigating device menus.
• Voice privacy
: Enable or disable Enhanced voice privacy, to
improve the security of phone calls.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
69
Section 5: Messaging
Types of Messages
Your device supports these types of messages:
•
Text messages
: Send and receive simple messages containing
text to other mobile phones or email addresses (also known as
SMS).
•
Multimedia messages
: Send and receive text messages with
pictures, video, and/or sound to other mobile phones or email
addresses (also known as MMS).
•
Mobile IMs
: Exchange Instant Messages with other users of
popular messaging sites.
•
Email
: Send and receive email from your email accounts,
including Corporate mail.
•
Gmail
: Send and receive Gmail from your Google account.
•
Voicemail
: Retrieve voice messages from callers.
•
Google Talk
: Chat with other Google Talk users.
Note:
Messaging service availability depends on your network
and service plan. Multimedia Messaging charges apply
per your Calling Plan. Monthly plans are available.
Higher rates apply for International Multimedia
Messaging (when available). Compatible Device
required. Consult Verizon Wireless for more information.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Messaging 70
Text and Multimedia Messaging
Your device can send and receive text and multimedia
messages.
Creating and Sending Messages
1. From the Home screen, touch
Messaging
.
2. Touch
New message
.
3. Touch
Enter recipient
and enter a name, phone number
or email address, or touch to add recipients from
Contacts. As you enter text, matching contacts appear.
Touch a contact to add it to the list.
4. Touch
Enter message
, then enter the message. While
entering the message, use these options (available
options depend on attachment):
•
Touch
Attach
to add media or content to the message
(converts the message to MMS).
•
Touch
Menu
for options:
–
Insert smiley
: Add a text emoticon to the message.
–
Add text
: Select text from S Memo, Calendar, Contacts or Text
templates to add.
–
View contact
: Display the addressed contact’s information.
–
Preview
: View the message and attachments before sending.
–
Add to Contacts
: If the recipients are not saved in Contacts,
save the info as a new contact, or update an existing contact.
–
Add slide/Remove slide
: Add or remove a slide. Slides hold
pictures or other media, and adding a slide converts the
message to MMS.
–
Add subject
: Add a subject field (converts the message to
MMS.)
–
Duration
: Set the length of time the media on the slide displays.
–
Layout
: Choose whether the message text appears above (Text
on top) of the attachment(s), or after (Text on bottom).
–
Priority level
: Set the urgency of the message.
–
Discard
: Erase the message without sending it.
5. Touch to send the message.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
71
Managing Messages
Messages you send and receive to the same contact, number
or address are grouped together as a “thread”, so you can
see all the messages you exchanged with a recipient in one
place, like a conversation.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Messaging
.
2. Message threads display by contact, number, or
address. While viewing message threads, you have
these options:
•
Touch and hold a thread to choose options, including:
–
View Contact / Add to Contacts
: View the contact record, or
save the sender/recipient’s information.
–
Delete thread
: Erase the entire message thread.
–
Save messages
: Save the message to
•
Touch
Menu
for options, including:
–
Search
: Enter characters to search messages and recipients.
–
Delete threads
: Choose message threads to erase.
–
Draft messages
: View messages you’ve created but not yet
sent.
–
Locked messages
: View messages you’ve locked. Locked
messages cannot be deleted.
–
Save messages
: Save messages to storage.
–
Settings
: Configure Messaging settings.
–
About
: View information about Messaging.
Message Settings
Configure settings for message storage, delivery, or alerts.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Messaging
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Settings
for options:
•Display
:
–
Bubble style
: Choose the appearance of messages in a
message thread. Touch a bubble style for each side of the
conversation, then touch
Save
.
–
Background style
: Choose the appearance of the screen
behind message threads. Touch a style, then touch
Save
.
–
Split view
: When enabled, messages display in a split screen
view when the device is in landscape orientation.
–
Use the volume key
: When enabled, you can change the size
of message text while viewing by pressing the Volume Key.
• General settings
:
–
Restore
messages
: Restore messages saved to an optional
memory card back to the Messaging app.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Messaging 72
–
Delete old messages
: When enabled, messages are
automatically erased when storage reaches default limits. When
disabled, the device will prompt you to delete old messages to
make room.
–
Text message limit
: Set the number of SMS messages per
conversation.
–
Multimedia message limit
: Set the number of MMS
messages per thread.
–
Text templates
: Text templates are phrases that you can add
to your messages. Use a pre-loaded text template, or create
your own.
• Text message (SMS) settings
:
–
Delivery reports
: When enabled, you receive a delivery report
for text messages you send.
–
Manage SIM card messages
: View and manage messages
you’ve stored on an installed SIM card.
• Multimedia message (MMS) settings
:
–
Delivery reports
: When enabled, you receive a delivery report
for multimedia messages you send.
–
Auto-retrieve
: When enabled, MMS messages download
automatically. When disabled, the device prompts for download.
–
Roaming auto-retrieve
: When enabled, MMS messages
download and display automatically when roaming. When
disabled, the device prompts you to download new MMS
messages.
–
MMS alert
: When enabled, your device alerts you when a
message changes from SMS to MMS, such as when you attach
a picture.
–
Group conversations
: When you enter multiple recipients, the
message is considered a group message. When this option is
enabled, replies to the original message are sent to all
recipients.
• Notification settings
:
–
Notifications
: When enabled, message alerts display in the
Status bar.
–
Select ringtone
: Choose a sound for message alerts.
–
Vibrate
: Configure vibration for message alerts.
–
Message alert repetition
: Choose the frequency of alerts for
new messages.
–
Preview message
: When enabled, a preview of new
messages appears in the Status bar with the message
notification.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
73
• Emergency message settings
:
–
Emergency Alerts
: This device is designed to receive Wireless
Emergency Alerts from the Commercial Mobile Alert Service
(CMAS), including Presidential Alerts, Imminent Alerts (Severe or
Extreme), and AMBER Alerts (missing persons). You may choose
not to receive Imminent and AMBER alerts, but Presidential
Alerts cannot be disabled. All alerts are enabled by default
(checkmark shown). For more information about Emergency
Alerts see
“Emergency Alerts”
on page 74.
–
Emergency notification preview
: Listen to an example of a
Emergency Alert tone (and vibration, if enabled). The Emergency
Alert tone plays at the same volume as your call ringtone.
–
Vibrate
: Configure vibration for Emergency Alerts.
–
Alert reminder
: Choose whether, and at what interval, your
device plays a sound to notify you of an Emergency Alert after
the Emergency Alert tone has stopped.
• Signature settings
–
Add signature
: When enabled, a text signature is added to all
messages you send.
–
Signature text
: Enter a text signature to add to messages
when Add signature is enabled (available when Add signature is
enabled).
• Callback number
–
Enable callback number
: When enabled, a telephone
number is included in messages you send.
–
Callback number
: Enter a telephone number to add to
messages when Enable callback number is enabled (available
when Enable callback number is enabled).
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Messaging 74
Emergency Alerts
This device is designed to receive Wireless Emergency Alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alert Service (CMAS).
Emergency Alerts are geographically-targeted, and alert
customers of imminent threats to their safety within their
area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency Alert.
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:
•
Presidential
•
Imminent (Severe or Extreme)
•
AMBER Alerts (missing person alert)
Customers may choose not to receive Imminent Alerts and
AMBER Alerts. Presidential Alerts can not be disabled. To
disable Imminent Threat Alerts (Extreme and Severe) and
AMBER Alerts, follow these instructions:
1. From the Home screen, touch
Messaging
.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
Settings
➔
Emergency
Alerts
.
3. All alerts are enabled by default (checkmark showing).
To disable alerts, touch an alert to remove the
checkmark.
Email
Send and receive email using popular email services.
Setting Up Email Accounts
You can configure Email for most accounts in just a few
steps.
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Email
.
2. The first time you set up an email account, select your
email provider.
– or –
For subsequent accounts, touch
Menu
➔
Settings
➔
, then
select your email provider.
3. Follow the prompts to set up your email account.
Note:
For more information on setting up your email, visit the
Smartphone Resource Center at:
https://smartphones.verizonwireless.com
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
75
Deleting Email Accounts
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Email
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Settings
➔
.
3. Select email account(s) for deletion, then touch
DELETE
.
Syncing Email Accounts
Syncing refreshes your device with the account’s servers.
When you set up an email account, you can choose whether
the account syncs in the background, or manually.
From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Email
➔
Sync
.
Email Settings
Use settings to configure handling of your email.
Note:
Available settings depend on the email provider.
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Email
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Settings
➔
General preferences
for
options:
• Auto-advance
: Choose the screen to display after you delete a
message.
• Message preview line
: Choose the number of lines of email
text to display in the preview screen.
•Email title
: Choose how emails are titled in the preview screen.
• Confirm deletions
: When enabled, Email will prompt you to
confirm when you delete messages.
• Quick responses
: View and manage text phrases that you can
insert into emails.
•Split view mode
: When enabled, emails display in a split
screen view when the device is in landscape orientation.
• Priority senders
: Enter email addresses, to have emails from
the addresses treated as a priority.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Messaging 76
• Email notifications
: Enable or disable display of notifications
for new emails in the Status bar.
• Select ringtone
: Choose a sound to play with new email
notifications.
•Vibrate
: Enable or disable vibration to play with new email
notifications.
3. Touch an account to configure specific settings.
Available options depend on the account.
Composing and Sending Email
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Email
.
2. If you have multiple accounts set up, choose an
account from the menu at the top of the screen.
3. Touch
COMPOSE
, then touch fields to enter
recipients and the email text.
4. While composing a message, use these options:
•
Touch
Menu
for options. Available options depend on the
type of email account.
•
Touch
Attach
to add a file to the message. Available
options depend on the type of email account.
5. Touch
Send
to send the message.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
77
Gmail
Send and receive emails via Gmail, Google’s web-based
email.
From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Gmail
.
Setting Up Your Gmail Account
The first time you launch Gmail, your device will prompt you
to set up your Google account, if you haven’t already set it
up. If you set up your Google account on your device, Gmail
is set up automatically
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Gmail
.
2. Follow the prompts to sign in, or create a new account.
3. The device communicates with the Google server to set
up your account and synchronize your email.
Note:
You can use more than one Google account on your
device. To add another account, use the
Menu
➔
Settings
➔
ADD ACCOUNT
option.
Refreshing Your Gmail Account
Syncing refreshes your device with the account’s servers.
When you set up an email account, you can choose whether
the account syncs in the background, or manually.
From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Gmail
➔
Sync
.
Gmail Settings
Use settings to configure your Gmail preferences.
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Gmail
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Settings
for options.
Composing and Sending Gmail
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Gmail
.
2. Touch
Compose
, then touch fields to compose the
message. While composing, touch
Menu
for
options.
3. To send the message, touch
Send
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Messaging 78
Voicemail
All unanswered calls to your device are sent to voice mail,
even if your device is turned off, so you’ll want to set up your
voice mail and personal greeting as soon as you activate
your device.
Visual Voice Mail is a feature that allows you to review your
voicemails on your device, including the option to listen to
your voicemail in any order. There is a monthly charge for
Visual Voice Mail, and airtime charges may apply. For more
information, contact Verizon Wireless.
Setting up Voicemail
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Voice Mail
.
– or –
From the Home screen, touch
Phone
, then touch
and hold .
2. Follow the automated instructions to set up your
password and record a greeting.
Checking Voicemail
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Voice Mail
.
– or –
From the Home screen, touch , then touch and
hold .
2. Follow the automated instructions to manage
voicemail.
Clearing Voicemail Notifications
When you have new voicemail, your device alerts you by
displaying an icon in the Status bar, and, depending on your
settings, by playing sound and vibration. If you want to
remove the icon from the Status bar, use the Clear
notifications option.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Voice Mail
➔
Clear notifications
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
79
Google Talk
Chat with other Google Talk users.
Note:
Talk requires that you have a Google account set up on
your device. For more information, see “Setting Up Your
Accounts” on page 44. If you set up your Google
account, you are automatically logged in.
From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Talk
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 80
Section 6: Applications
Managing Applications
Apps displays all applications installed on your device,
including apps you download and install.
You can change the way apps appear on the screen, uninstall
apps you’ve downloaded, and share apps with friends. When
you install new apps, new screens are added to hold them.
Tip:
You can place shortcuts to apps on the Home screen, for
quick access to the application. For more information, see
“Shortcuts” on page 38.
Downloading and Installing Apps
Find new apps to download and install on your device:
•
Play Store
: For more information, see
“Play Store”
on
page 102.
•
S Suggest
: For more information, see
“S Suggest”
on
page 103.
Uninstalling Apps
You can uninstall apps you download and install. Pre-loaded
apps cannot be uninstalled.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
.
2. Touch
Menu
➔
Uninstall
.
3. Apps that can be uninstalled show on their icon.
Touch , then follow the prompts to uninstall the
app. Pre-loaded apps cannot be uninstalled.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
81
Customizing the Apps Screens
Choosing a view
By default, app icons appear in Grid view. You can change
the view to list view.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps.
2. Touch
Menu
, then touch
View type
.
3. Choose an option:
• Customizable Grid
: The default view, which allows you to
touch and hold on apps to move them from screen to screen.
• Alphabetical grid
: Icons are arranged in a grid, in A-Z order.
• Alphabetical list
: Icons display in a list, sorted from A-Z.
Apps screen options
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps.
2. Touch
Menu
for options:
•Play Store
: Launch Google
™
Play Store, to browse for new
apps to download.
•Edit
: Touch and hold an app icon for these options:
–
Drag it to a new location.
–
Drag it to to create a new folder to contain the icon.
–
Drag it to to create a new apps screen and place the icon
on it.
–
Drag it to to launch Application manager to view information
about the app. For more information, see
“Application
manager”
on page 174.
–
Drag to (if available) to remove the icon. The trashcan is
only available for apps you’ve installed. Pre-loaded apps cannot
be removed.
• Create folder
: Create a new folder to contain apps.
• Uninstall
: Remove an app that you downloaded from your
device. Preloaded apps cannot be uninstalled.
• Downloaded applications
: Display all apps you’ve
downloaded.
•View type
: Configure the apps screen.
• Share apps
: Select apps you’ve downloaded (not available for
pre-loaded apps) to share via Bluetooth, Email, Gmail,
Google+, Messaging, S Note, or Wi-Fi Direct.
• Hide applications/Show hidden applications
: Control
whether app icons are visible in Apps. Hiding an icon does not
remove the app from your device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 82
Action Memo
The S Pen and inventive Action Memo let you quickly access
the information you need, while using any application. You
can keep a memo always nearby by pinning it to the screen.
Link your short notes to applications like Phone, Contacts,
Messages and so on. For more information, refer to “S Pen”
on page 39.
Creating a New Memo
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Action Memo
. The action
Memo screen is displayed.
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to
enter edit mode.
– or –
Tap (
Create
) to create a new action memo.
3. Use the on-screen options to create your memo.
4. Tap
Save
to store the new memo.
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described
in the following table:
Allows you to add free-format drawing and change the
input color.
Allows you to erase marks and drawings.
Circle an on-screen text or drawing to then assign that
as an action item to an available application such as:
Call, Contacts, Messages, Email, Internet, Maps
Calendar event.
Displays additional functions.
Allows you to edit the current color.
Detaches the current memo and converts it in a small
popup box.
Reduces the number of on-screen options.
Closes the current session and save the action
memo.
Cancels the current memo.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
83
5. From within the main application screen select the
following functions:
•Search
: allows you to search for information within existing
memos.
•Create
: allows you to create a new memo.
•Delete
: allows you to delete an existing memo.
Amazon
???
Amazon Kindle
???
Amazon MP3
???
Appstore
???
Audible
???
Bloomberg+
This application provide access to the latest business news
and data, no matter where you are.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Galaxy Plus
➔
Bloomberg+
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Saves the current memo and creates a new one.
Add an additional page to the memo.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 84
Calculator
Using this feature allows you to use your device as a
calculator. The calculator provides the basic arithmetic
functions; addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
You can also use this as a scientific calculator.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Calculator
.
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the
Plus, Minus, Multiplication,
or
Division
key.
4. Enter the next number.
5. To view the result, tap the
= (equals)
key.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.
Note:
Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional
scientific functions.
Calendar
With this feature, you can consult the calendar by day, week,
or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a
reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and
synchronizes both new and existing entries between your
phone and your online Google account.
Important!
You should previously add an account (Facebook,
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to
using the Calendar.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Calendar
. The following tabs are available on the
right side of the display:
•Year
: displays the Year view.
•Month
: displays the Month view.
• Week
: displays the Week view.
•Day
: displays the Day view.
•List
: displays the events in a List view.
•Task
: allows you to search for tasks.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
85
2. Tap
Create event
to create a new Calendar
event.
– or –
Tap
Today
to display the current date indicated by a
blue box, then press and select one of the
following options:
•Go to
: displays a specific date.
•Delete
: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,
or an individual event.
•Search
: allows you to search within your current events.
•Calendars
: allows you to view the current Calendar accounts.
• Settings
: displays a list of configurable settings.
Creating a Calendar Event
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Calendar
.
2. Within the Year, Month, Week, and Day tabs,
Create event
to create a new Calendar event.
Enabling the Handwriting mode
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Calendar
.
2. Tap
Enable Handwriting
to edit the on-screen
Calendar by adding hand-written information.
3. Use the following functions:
Allows you to add free-format drawing.
Allows you to erase marks and drawings.
Undo the last action.
Redo the last action that was undone.
Exits the current action and returns to the Calendar
application.
Saves the current updates.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 86
Calendar Settings
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with
which you want the calendar o begin. You also select how
you want to view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or
determine how to manage events, notifications, sounds, and
defaults reminders.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔ .
2. Press ➔
Settings
.
3. Tap
View styles
and select an option.
•
Tap
Month view styles
and select an option.
•
Tap
Week view
and select a type.
4. Tap
First day of week
and select either
Locale default
,
Saturday
,
Sunday
or
Monday
.
5. Tap
Badge
and select either
None
,
Number of events
and tasks
,
Number of events today
, or
Number of tasks
today
.
6. Tap
Hide declined events
to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
7. Tap
Lock time zone
(to lock event time based on your
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone
from within the
Select time zone
field.
8. Tap
Show week number
to display the week numbers
along the side of the week entries.
9. Tap
Hide completed tasks
to activate this option. A
check mark indicates selection.
10. Tap
Weather
to activate this option. A check mark
indicates selection.
11. Tap
Set alerts & notifications
to adjust the event
notification method. Choose from:
Alert
,
Status bar
notification
, and
Off
.
12. Tap
Select ringtone
to assign a ringtone to a calendar
event notification.
13. Tap
Vibration
to assign a vibration notification to this
event.
14. Tap
Quick responses
to edit your default quick
responses for outbound emails. These are default
responses similar to those used by text templates.
Caller Name ID
???
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
87
Camera
Use your 13.0 XX?? megapixel camera feature to produce photos
in a JPEG format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in
an MP4 format.
Note:
A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take
pictures or shoot video.
It is recommended that you confirm your default storage
location for images and videos.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Camera
.
For more information, refer to “Using the Camera” on page 128.
Chrome
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google
Chrome Web browser on your device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Chrome
.
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap
Accept and Continue
.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap
Sign in
to
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap
No
thanks
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google
Chrome.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 88
Clock
Here you can set an Alarm, configure and view the World
clock, use a Stopwatch, set a Timer, or use a Desk Clock.
The applications display in a tabular format and quickly
accessed with the touch of a finger.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Clock
.
Setting an Alarm
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Clock
.
2. From the
Alarm
tab, tap
Create alarm
.
3. Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour, and
minutes, then tap
AM
or
PM
(toggles depending on
which was last selected).
4. Tap the
Alarm repeat
field and touch the number of
times you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are:
day blocks or
Repeat weekly
. Selected day blocks turn
blue when active.
5. Tap the
Alarm type
field and select one of the following:
Melody
,
Vibration
,
Vibration and melody
, or
Briefing
.
6. Tap the
Alarm tone
field and either select an available
tone or select
Add
to use locate a sound to use as an
alarm ringtone. Tap
OK
to activate the ringtone.
7. Slide the slider bar left or right in the
Alarm volume
field
to decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of
the volume level plays.
8. Move the
Location alarm
slider to the right to activate
the feature, then follow the on-screen instructions to
enter a location. When activated, the alarm only
sounds when you are at a specific location.
9. Move the
Snooze
slider to the right to activate the
feature. Tap the field to assign a
Interval
time
(3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or
30 minutes) and
Repeat
(1 time, 2 times, 3 times,
5 times, and 10 times).
•Interval
indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent
between alarm notifications (snooze time).
•Repeat
indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are
assigned to this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence
the alarm.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
89
10. Move the
Smart alarm
slider to the right to activate this
feature which slowly increases screen brightness and
the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking.
Tap the field to assign a interval time (1 minute,
3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or
30 minutes) and nature tone (Fairy fountain, Birdsong
by the lake, Sparkling mist, The secret forest, Serenity,
or Gentle spring rain).
•Interval
category describes the length of time the alarm will
remain silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).
•Tone
category provides one of several nature sounds that are
used as the alarm tone.
11. Tap the
Name
field and enter a name for this Alarm.
12. Tap
Save
to store the new alarm event.
13. Touch and slide to any direction to stop an
alarm when it sounds.
Setting the Snooze Feature
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and slide to any direction. Snooze must
first be set in the alarm settings.
Deleting an Existing Alarm
1. From within the
Clock
application, touch and hold an
on-screen alarm event.
2. Tap
Delete
.
World Clock
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part
of world.
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap the
World clock
tab.
2. Tap
Add city
then scroll and select the desired
city, or tap in the search field to locate a city.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 90
To assign DST settings:
1. Locate a desired city from the World clock list.
2. Touch and hold a city and select
DST settings
.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, or 1 hour).
If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol
appears next to the World Clock city listing.
Stopwatch
This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the
stopwatch keep running.
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap
Stopwatch
tab.
2. Tap
Start
to start the stopwatch counter.
3. Tap
Lap
to begin the lap time counter.
4. Tap
Stop
to stop the counter.
5. Tap
Restart
to restart the lap counter. You can have
multiple lap times.
6. Tap
Reset
to reset the counter.
Setting a Timer
1. From within the
Clock
application, tap
Timer
tab.
2. Tap the
Hours
,
Minutes
, or
Seconds
field and use the
on-screen keypad to enter the hour, minute, or
seconds. The timer plays an alarm at the end of the
countdown.
3. Tap
Start
to start the timer.
4. Tap
Stop
to stop the timer or
Reset
to reset the timer
and start over.
5. Tap
Restart
to resume the timer counter.
Contacts
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to
your Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Contacts
.
For more information, refer to “Contacts List” on page 83.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
91
Downloads
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Downloads
.
2. Place a checkmark on an available file to select it.
3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort
by size/date, or Clear list.
Email
Email enables you to review and create email using most
email services. The device alerts you when you receive an
email message.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Email
.
For more information, refer to “Using Email” on page 116.
Evernote
This application allows you to easily remind yourself of things
across all of your current devices. Evernote lets you create
to-do lists, take pictures, record voice memos, and write
reminders to yourself. These notes are both accessible and
searchable from any location that is accessible by your
device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Galaxy Plus
➔
Evernote
.
Note:
If prompted for an update, follow the on-screen
prompts.
2. Tap either
CREATE ACCOUNT
or
SIGN IN
and follow the
on-screen instructions.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 92
Flipboard
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,
photos from friends and much more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Galaxy Plus
➔
Flipboard
.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Gallery
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and
share as a picture message.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Gallery
.
For more information, refer to “The Gallery” on page 147.
Gmail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a Web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on
your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically
synchronize with your Gmail account.
Creating a New Google Account
You should create a Google™ Account when you first use
your device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This
account provides access to several device features such as
Gmail™, Hangouts™, and the Google Play Store™
applications. Before you are able to access Google
applications, you must enter your account information. These
applications sync between your device and your online
Google account.
Signing into Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account
(such as Play Store or Gmail).
2. Click
Existing
.
3. Tap the
Email
and
Password
fields and enter your
information.
4. Tap (
Sign in
). Your device communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
93
5. If prompted, you can enable the option to stay up to
date on news and offers, then tap
OK
.
Creating an Additional Gmail Account
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Gmail
.
2. Press and then tap
Settings
➔
ADD ACCOUNT
and
follow the same steps as referenced in the previous
section. For more information, refer to “Signing into
Your Google Account” on page 92.
Retrieving your Google Account Password
A Google account password is required for Google
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and
navigate to
http://google.com/accounts.
2. Click on the
Can’t access your account?
link.
3. Follow the on-screen password recovery procedure.
Google
Use Google Search to search the Web.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Google
and enter the search
text.
– or –
Tap on the Google Search bar and say the search
information.
Google Settings
As Google has become more intertwined with other
applications, this menu provides a quick and ready access
point to configure preferences for Google+, Maps & Latitude,
Location, etc.. You can also use the Search function to
initiate a Google Search from this menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Google Settings
and select an
on-screen option.
2. Select one of the available on-screen options.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 94
Google +
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your
own private album on Google+.
1. Sign on to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Google+
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap
Add account
to create another account.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.
5. Visit
www.google.com/mobile/+/
for more information.
Group Play
This application lets you share documents, photos or music
in real-time with other connected friends.
Note:
Group play is not the same as Screen mirroring which
requires a connection to a Wi-Fi capable Samsung TV or
via the use of the AllShare Cast Hub.
For more information, refer to “AllShare Cast Hub” on
page 148.
Important!
To share a Group Play, all users must be connected
to the same Wi-Fi access point.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Group Play
.
2. Read the on-screen Disclaimer information and tap
Agree
to continue.
3. Follow the on-screen tutorials.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
95
Creating a group
If you have media you want to share, create a group for other
users to join to and then share/collaborate with what you are
sharing.
The creator of the group is the leader and it the source of the
shared file. All other joined members can then interact with
the file being shared.
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm
your other participants are also connected to this same
Wi-Fi.
2. From within the Group Play application, tap the
Set
group password
field to enable the function which
requires users to enter a password prior to connecting
to your new group.
3. Tap
Create group
. If previously selected, enter your
group password and tap
OK
. Mobile AP is enabled.
4. Tap one of the media items listed under the
Share and
play content
heading.
5. Tap to select the items you want to share (indicated by
a checkmark), then tap
Done
or
OK
.
6. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their
devices (see below) and they can view your media
using you as a Mobile AP.
Joining a group
A joiner is the participant of an already created group. You
can only view and interact with media shared by the leader
of an existing group.
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm
your connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader.
2. From within the Group Play application, tap
Join group
.
Your device then scans for available groups for you to
join.
3. Select a group to join. Once connected, you can then
select the shared content and interact with your
group’s shared media.
4. Press and select
Help
for additional information.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 96
Using Group Play to Share Videos via Split
Screens
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm
your connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader.
2. From within the Group Play application, tap
Create
group
. If previously selected, enter your group
password and tap
OK
.
3. Before continuing, have all users launch their
respective Group Play application and connect to your
new group.
Important!
Once users begin to connect, you are notified by an
on-screen pop up and the connected user indicator
( ) displays the new number of connected
users.
4. On your source device, tap
Share video,
select the
desired video file ➔
Done
.
5. As the video begins to play, all connected users must
tap the
Share video
option within their Group Play.
Note:
Without users tapping the
Share video
option, the
Sharing slider is disabled and the video only displays on
the device.
6. At the source device, drag the enabled Split screen
slider from a single screen session ( ) to the
Multi-Screen setting ( ) to span videos across
multiple devices.
7. Use the on-screen number on each participant’s screen
to align the devices accordingly and display the same
video over several different screens.
Using Group Play to Simultaneously Share Music
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm
your connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader.
2. From within the Group Play application, tap
Create
group
. If previously selected, enter your group
password and tap
OK
.
3. Before continuing, have all users launch their
respective Group Play application and connect to your
new group.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
97
4. On your source device, tap
Share music,
select the
desired file ➔
Done
.
5. As the song begins to play, all connected users must
tap the
Share music
option within their Group Play.
Hangouts
Previously known as Google Talk™, is an updated place to
hangout, share photos, and even video calls. This is a free
web-based application for instant messaging offered by
Google. Conversation logs are automatically saved to a Chats
area in your Gmail account. This allows you to search a chat
log and store them in your Gmail accounts.
Note:
Before using this application, you must first have an
active Gmail account available and be currently
logged in.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Hangouts
.
Note:
If you are not already logged into Google, refer to the
instructions for signing in on page 92.
2. When prompted, read the on-screen information and
confirm your phone number is correct before using the
application. Tap
Confirm
.
Note:
Confirming your phone number does not make it publicly
available.
Help
Provides access to built-in Help information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Help
.
2. Select an on-screen topics for more information:
•New features
: provides help on all of the new features and
applications such as My Magazine, Air command, Chart
Builder, Direct Pen input, Scrapbook, and S Finder.
•Basics
: provides basic information on using your device.
•Applications
: provides information on how to use basic
applications like Contacts, Email, S Note, Internet, Camera, etc.
• Settings
: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot, Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC,
Screen Mirroring, Voice control.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 98
• Online help
: provides more detailed online help for additional
questions you may have.
IMDb
???
Internet
Open the browser to start surfing the Web. The browser is
fully optimized and comes with advanced functionality to
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.
Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate
the mobile Web. This section explains how to navigate the
browser and use the basic features.
Accessing the Internet
To access the Browser:
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Internet
.
KNOX
Samsung KNOX is a comprehensive enterprise mobile
solution for use with both work and play. This application
must be downloaded to the device before use.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
KNOX
.
2. Tap
OK
and follow the on-screen instructions.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
99
Local
??
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
??
Local
.
Maps
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view
real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination
directions. There is also a search tool included to help you
locate places of interest or a specific address. You can view
locations on a vector or aerial map, or you can view locations
at the street level.
Important!
Before using Google Maps you must have an active
data (3G/4G/LTE) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps
application does not cover every country or city.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Maps
.
Important!
For best results, it is recommended that you enable
all of your location services. For more information,
refer to “Location Services” on page 257.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 100
Enabling a Location source
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To
enable the location source you must enable the wireless
network, or enable the GPS satellites.
Important!
The more location determining functions are
enabled, the more accurate the determination is of
your position.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
Connections
tab ➔
Location services
.
2. Tap
Access to my location
to enable sharing your
location with requesting applications.
3. Tap
Use GPS satellites
to enable the GPS satellite.
4. Tap
Use wireless networks
to allow apps to use data
from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to
provide a better approximation of your current location.
5. Tap
My places
to enable the storage of your favorite
locations.
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
•
inside a building or between buildings
•
in a tunnel or underground passage
•
in poor weather
•
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
in a vehicle with tinted windows
Opening Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Maps
.
2. Tap the upper-right My location button to find your
location on the map with a blinking blue dot.
3. Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access
additional options.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
101
Messages
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from
other mobile phones.
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile
phones.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Messages
.
For more information, refer to “Messages” on page 102.
Messenger
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into
a simple group conversation. When you get a new
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your
device.
1. Sign on to your Google account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Messenger
.
– or –
From the Google+ application, select
Messenger
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to
Google+.
– or –
Tap
Add account
to create another account.
4. When prompted, follow the on-screen procedures to
configure the Sync contacts parameters.
5. When prompted, configure the photo backup
parameters as desired and tap
Done
.
6. Tap from the upper-left of the screen and select
from an available list of features such as: Find People,
Communities, Hangouts, etc..
Mobile HotSpot
Provides access to the Tethering and Mobile HotSpot menu
where you can use either the USB tethering or portable
HotSpot functionality.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Mobile HotSpot
.
2. Activate the desired connection method.
For more information see either "USB Tethering"on page 234
or "Mobile HotSpot"on page 235.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 102
Music
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.
The music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger
than 300 KB are displayed).
Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Music
.
2. Tap a library category tab to select the music category:
Songs
,
Playlists
,
Albums
,
Artists
,
Music square
, or
Folders
.
3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin
playback.
Note:
The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or
sound is connected through the headset jack only.
4. Use any of the following Music player controls:
Pause the song.
Start the song after pausing.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to
go to next song.
Volume control and SoundAlive.
Volume control showing volume muted.
Plays the entire song list once.
Replays the current list when the list ends.
Repeats the currently playing song.
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.
Lists the current playlist songs.
Returns the user to the music category screen.
Assign the current song as a Favorite.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
103
Making a Song a Phone Ringtone
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Songs
tab.
2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the
on-screen context menu.
3. Tap
Set as
➔
Phone ringtone
.
4. Choose a starting point for the ringtone to start playing
from. Select either
From the beginning
or
Auto
recommendations
(you can allow the application to
choose the best part to start from).
Note:
Additional Set as options include
Caller ringtone
and
Alarm tone
.
Music Options
The Music settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the music player such as whether you want the music to play
in the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
With the application displayed and playing a song,
press and select one of the following options:
• Via Bluetooth
: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth
headset.
• Play via Group Play
: allows you to share music with others via
the Group Play application. All users must be connected to the
same Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to
“Group Play”
on
page 94.
• Add to playlist
: allows you to add the current music file to a
selected playlist.
•Set as
: allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone,
Caller ringtone, or Alarm tone. Additionally you can either
choose to start the selected song from the beginning or allow
the application to automatically recommend a start point.
• Scan for nearby devices
: allows you to look for DLNA -
compliant devices used to control streaming media.
Streams the current music file to another device
via Samsung Link.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 104
•Settings
: allows you to change your music player settings.
•Details
: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title,
Album, Track length, Genre, Track number, Format, Size, and
Location.
•End
: closes the application.
Music Settings
The settings menu allows you to set preferences for the
music player such as whether you want the music to play in
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
1. From within the
Music
application, press ➔
Settings
.
2. Select one of the following settings:
• Music menu
: this menu allows you to select which categories
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you
want to display in the Music menu.
• SoundAlive
: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.
• Adapt Sound
: enable or disable the adaptive sound feature to
adjust to the sound levels of your current environment.
• Play speed
: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and
2.0X using the slider.
• Music auto off
: when enabled, sets a timer for the Music
application to automatically turn off after a pre-selected amount
of time.
•Lyrics
: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if
available.
• Smart volume
: when activated, automatically adjusts each
track’s volume to an equal level.
• Voice control
: when activated, allows you to use voice control
commands to control the music player.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
105
Using Playlists
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for
playback. These Playlists can be created using the Music
player on this device, or using a third-party application (such
as Windows Media Player) and downloading those files to an
SD card inserted into the device.
Creating a Playlist
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Press and then tap
Create playlist
.
3. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new
name for this playlist, then tap
OK
.
Adding Music to a Playlist
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
3. Tap
Add music
. This option is available within
user-created playlists.
Note:
If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a
song name from the main screen to open the context
menu. Select
Add to playlist
and choose the playlist.
4. Tap a music file, or tap
Select all
to add all the music
tracks to this playlist then tap
Done
.
Removing Music from a Playlist
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
3. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
4. Tap
Remove
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 106
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you
can also share, delete, or rename the playlist.
Note:
Only those playlist you have created can be edited.
Default playlists can not be renamed.
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Playlists
tab.
2. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
3. Tap
Edit title
.
4. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap
OK
.
Transferring Music Files
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two
methods:
1. Downloaded to the device from the Play Store.
Music files are directly stored on your phone.
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD
card.
Removing Music Files
1. From within the
Music
application, tap the
Songs
tab.
2. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
3. Tap
Delete
➔
OK.
The music file(s) is deleted.
My Files
This application allows you to manage your sounds, images,
videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card
data in one convenient location. This application allows you
to launch a file if the associated application is already on
your phone (ex: MP4).
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
My Files
.
Note:
Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure
with folders, subfolders, etc.
Note:
The application lets you view supported image files and
text files on both your internal storage and microSD
card.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
107
Opening and Navigating within Files
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the
device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder
location.
To open files:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
My Files
.
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your
selected file.
•Home tab
allows you to back up to the root directory.
•Up tab
allows you to back up into a higher directory.
•
Press and then tap
View as
to change the way the files
are displayed on-screen. Choose from:
List
,
List and details
,
or
Thumbnail
.
•
Press
for these additional options:
Select all
,
Create folder
,
Sort by
,
Add shortcut
, and
Settings
.
To navigate:
1. Tap
All files
➔
Device storage/SD memory card
to see
the contents of either device or your internal SD card.
2. The following folders may display:
•ShareShot
: displays the files shared via a group share shot
session.
•Alarms
: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.
•Android
: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android
applications.
•Application
: this folder contains app info for S Note.
• Bluetooth
: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.
•DCIM
: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken
by the device. Tap
DCIM
➔
Camera
to view the picture or
video files.
•Download
: this folder contains downloads you have made.
•Movies
: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.
•Music
: this folder contains your Music files.
• Notifications
: this folder contains all of the notifications you
have received.
•Pictures
: this folder contains your photos.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 108
•Ringtones
: this folder contains any ringtones you have
purchased.
Note:
Different folders may display depending on how your
phone is configured.
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to
launch the associated application.
My Verizon Mobile
???
Navigation
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected
turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.
Important!
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your
device in the following conditions:
- inside a building or between buildings
- in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
- in a vehicle with tinted windows
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Navigation
.
Caution!
Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be
wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer regarding the current
release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept.
For more information, refer to “Enabling a Location source”
on page 100.
PEN.UP
This Samsung application allows you to join a an online
community, fallow your favorite artists, show off your
artwork, and connect with other artists.
This community brings together anyone that uses the S Pen
to draw, sketch, scribble or paint. Share pictures, comment
on other creations, or just browse through the pages for
something to add to your personal collection.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
PEN.UP
.
2. From the main screen tap either
Sign up
or
Explore
Pennable
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
109
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Phone
This application provides the ability to make or answering
calls, access the Contacts list, which is used to store contact
information.
From the Home screen, tap
Phone
.
For more information, refer to “Call Functions and Contacts
List” on page 60.
Play Books
Formerly known as Google Books, this application allows you
to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books: jump
right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free
ebooks. Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading
where you left off on your phone or computer, and settle
down with a great book on your Android phone!
Note:
You must logged into your Google account prior to using
this feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Play Books
.
2. If prompted, tap
Turn sync on
. This synchronizes your
books you have previously selected between your
Books account and your device.
3. Tap to begin searching for both free and paid
ebooks.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook
to your device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 110
Play Magazines
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your
device at any time or any place.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Play Magazines
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. For more information, refer to “Signing into
Your Google Account” on page 92.
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon to
browse the full catalog.
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap
Accept
.
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and
subscribe.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a
magazine.
Play Movies & TV
This application allows you to connect to the Play Store,
download a movie and then watch it instantly.
Choose from thousands of movies, including new releases and
HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your
Android device.
Movies, previously rented via the Play Store are automatically
added to your My Movies library across your devices.
Learn more about Google Play Movies at:
http://play.google.com/about/movies
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Play Movies & TV
.
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already
done so. A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays
in the Video list.
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and
viewing movies.
4. Tap the
MOVIES
tab to view movies you have rented.
5. Tap the
TV SHOWS
tab to view shows you have rented.
6. Tap the
PERSONAL VIDEOS
tab to view movies you have
on your device or memory card.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
111
For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature
for video playback, see “Using Picture-In-Picture” on
page 129.
Play Music
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop,
and playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The
music you choose is automatically stored in your Google
Music library and instantly ready to play or download.
Access the new music tab from within your Play Store
application.
The Music application contains a music player that plays
music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Play Music
.
The Music app searches both your online library and
your device’s internal storage for music and playlists;
this can take from a few seconds to several minutes,
depending on the amount of new music added since
you last opened the application. It then displays a
carousel view of your new and recent music, organized
by album.
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to link
your current account to Google Play Music.
3. Tap an on-screen account to add it or select
Add
account
to use a new account.
4. At the free songs screen, select either
Get free songs
or
Skip
.
•
Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play
Store.
•
Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions.
5. Swipe left or right to browse through your new and
available music. Music, albums, and artists are
grouped into categories.
6. Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback.
7. Return to the Library screen from most other screens
in the Music application by tapping the Music
application icon
Music notification icon
at the top-
left of the Application bar.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 112
Play Store
Formerly known as the “Android Market”, this application
provides access to downloadable applications and games to
install on your phone. The Play Store also allows you to
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
Before using the Play Store, you must have a Google
Account.
Accessing the Play Store
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Play Store
.
2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap
Next
.
3. Tap
Existing
and enter your Google account
information.
4. Tap
Accept
to agree to the Play Store terms of service.
Downloading a New Google
Application
To download a new application, you will need to use your
Google account to sign in to the Play Store. The home page
provides several ways to find applications. The home page
features applications and includes a list of item applications
by category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My
apps.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
(
Play Store
).
2. Browse through the categories, find an application
you're interested in, and tap the name.
3. Read the application descriptions.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
113
Important!
If the selected application requires access to data
or control of a function on your device, the Play
Store displays the information the application will
access.
Tap
OK
if you agree to the conditions of the
application. Once you tap
OK
on this screen you are
responsible for using this application on the device
and the amount of data it uses. Use this feature
with caution.
4. Tap
Install
➔
ACCEPT
.
Note:
Use caution with applications which request access to
any personal data, functions, or significant amounts of
data usage times.
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay
for the application.
6. Check the progress of the current download by
opening the Notifications panel. The content download
icon appears in the notification area of the status
bar.
7. On the main Play Store screen, press and then
tap
My Apps
, tap an installed application in the list, and
then tap
Open
.
Note:
A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may
apply. Please contact your service provider for further
details.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 114
Launching an Installed Google
Application
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
.
2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is
typically located on the last Applications page.
Unknown sources
This feature can be used for Android application
development. The feature allows developers to install
non-Play Store applications.
From the main
Settings
page, tap
General
tab ➔
Security
➔
Unknown sources
.
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it
is active.
Note:
If Unknown sources is disabled, those applications
without a certificate are not allowed to download to your
device.
Manage applications
This feature allows you to manage and remove installed
applications. You can also view the amount of memory or
resources used as well as the remaining memory and
resources for each of the applications on your device and
clear the data, cache, or defaults.
From the main
Settings
page, tap
General
tab ➔
Application manager
.
Clearing application cache and data
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
General
tab ➔
Application manager
.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap
Force stop
,
Uninstall, Clear data
,
Clear cache
, or
Clear defaults
.
Uninstalling third-party applications
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and
installed from the Play Store.
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
General
tab ➔
Application manager
➔
Downloaded
.
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the
App info
screen, tap
Uninstall
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
115
POLARIS Office 5
Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a central
place for managing your documents online or offline.
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable
Document Format) files.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Galaxy Plus
➔
POLARIS Office 5
.
2. From the Registration screen, enter your Email
information (if desired) and tap
Register
to complete
the process.
– or –
Tap
Skip
to ignore this registration. The main Polaris
Office screen displays.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office.
S Health
S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better
manage your health by providing you with relevant
information.
Note:
Access to this feature requires that you already be
logged in to your Samsung account application. For
more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 17.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
S Health
.
2. Read the introduction and tap
Start
.
3. Read the Terms and conditions information, place a
checkmark in the
Agree
checkbox.
4. Tap
Next
.
5. Enter your personal information, then tap
Next
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.
7. Press and then tap
Help
for more detailed
information.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 116
S Note
Use this application to create notes with productivity tools
that turn handwriting into typed text and correct drawn
shapes, lines, and formulas to make them perfect.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
S Note
.
2. Tap
Start
and follow the on-screen instructions.
S Translator
Allows you can easily translate words and phrases (verbal or
text messages) into many different languages.
Note:
Access to this feature requires that you already be
logged in to your Samsung account application. For
more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 17.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
S Translator
.
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to log
into your Samsung account.
To translate text:
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar to
select your target/source language. Default is Spanish.
2. Tap the bottom language bar to select the destination
language that you would like to translate to. Default is
English (US).
3. Enter text into the top box and it will automatically be
translated into the lower box.
4. Tap the selected
Translate
button within the
bottom field. The top target language field is then
updated with the new translation.
To translate using your voice:
Important!
The two on-screen buttons at the bottom of the
application correspond to the two currently
selected languages.
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the left voice button to
verbally speak the selected language (corresponds to
top field).
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
117
2. Wait a few seconds until the on-screen notification
shows “Speak in...” then speak using the selected
language.
3. Within a few seconds, confirm the translated text now
appears in the other translation field.
4. Tap the selected
Speak
button to translate
using your selected input language and voice.
•
Example, if trying to speak in English and get a Spanish
translation, tap the
Speak (English (US))
button and wait for
the text to display on-screen.
5. Press for additional options. Choose from:
TTS readout speed, Auto readout, and Help.
S Voice
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system that
allows you to initiate several common tasks without having
to touch the device.
This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide
variety of functions on your device. This is a natural language
recognition application.
This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature
that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms.
You can ask questions (Is it raining in Dallas?) or give voice
commands (Show me where to find cheap gas).
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
S Voice
.
Using S Voice
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
S Voice
.
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer information and tap
Confirm
to continue.
3. Review the Terms of Service and tap
Agree
to continue.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 118
4. Navigate through the following on-screen tutorial
screens by reading the information and tapping
Next
,
or tap
Skip
to continue without reading the information.
5. Wake up the application by repeating the phrase
Hi Galaxy
.
Note:
The wake-up command/phrase can be changed from
“Hi Galaxy” to anything else.
6. Tap
Speak
if the device does not hear you or
to give it a command.
Example 1:
•
I want to find the best pizza online.
•
Tap and say “Find me the best Pizza”. This launches
an Internet search.
Example 2:
•
I want to go to Cambridge.
•
Tap and say “Navigate to Cambridge”. This launches
the Map application and indicates where this is in relation to
your current position.
Samsung Apps
Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications
that are directly compatible with your device. This includes
games, news, reference, social networking, navigation, and
more. Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter.
Note:
Access to this feature requires that you already be
logged in to your Samsung account application. For
more information, refer to “Creating a Samsung
Account” on page 17.
1. Confirm you are currently signed into your Samsung
account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung Apps
.
3. If prompted, read the Disclaimer, Terms and conditions,
and Privacy policy and tap
Accept
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
119
Samsung Hub
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one user-
friendly location. With hundreds of titles available,
entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.
You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch
from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile
entertainment.
Note:
Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability.
You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and
rent content via Samsung Hub.
Important!
You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE
connection to preview and download a media file.
The internal memory acts as a storage location for
your downloaded rental or purchase.
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
Important!
The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and
Samsung Hub.
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung Hub
.
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select
either
Cancel
or
Connect
.
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or
verified, tap
OK
. You must be signed in to your
Samsung account to use the application’s various
features.
Tip:
In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your
Samsung account via the application.
Press and then select
Sign in
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 120
Note:
Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung
account application. This application manages your user
profile information.
Using Samsung Hub
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently
added media that you can rent or purchase.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung Hub
.
•
The
OVERVIEW
screen (landing page) displays an main access
for all available categories and recently available content for
purchase or rental.
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following
available pages:
•MUSIC
: displays featured Music content available for purchase/
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music
store page by clicking on the "Music” link at the top of the
page.
•VIDEO
: displays featured film and TV content available for
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &
TV store page by clicking the "Video" link a the top of the page.
• BOOKS
: displays featured Book content available for purchase
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by
clicking the "Books" link a the top of the page.
• GAMES
: displays featured Game content available from the
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking
the "Games" link a the top of the page.
3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to
the product detail page.
4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,
rent, or stream the content directly from the product
detail page.
5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen
instructions.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
121
Samsung Hub Notices
•
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after
you create an account in Samsung Hub.
•
Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the
service”) that are also registered to the same account.
•
You may remove a device from your account no more than once
every 90 days.
•
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media
Content later subject to content re-download availability and
content provider permissions.
•
You may need network coverage to access Media Content you
have acquired through the Service.
•
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media
Content.
•
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content is
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.
•
Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.
•
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
•
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the
Media Content has been buffered.
•
You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24
consecutive hours).
•
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
•
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).
•
Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your
mobile device output.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 122
Samsung Link
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung
mobile phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps
tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s Samsung Link makes
staying connected easy.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with
other external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living
Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also
be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs
via a digital multimedia streamer.
Important!
The Samsung account manages the access
information (username/password) to several
applications, such as Samsung Link.
AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:
Important!
You must connect both of your communicating
devices to the same Wi-Fi and use an
active/registered Samsung account prior to using
this application.
For more information, refer to “Wi-Fi settings” on
page 240.
For more information, refer to “Creating a
Samsung Account” on page 17.
Samsung Link/
AllShare Play
This new feature builds on the
previous AllShare Play functionality. It
includes features such as Web storage
integration and social networking
integration. This is a Web service
that requires using a Samsung account.
Group Play
A subset feature of Samsung Link, this
allows you to mirror photos and
multimedia presentations with other
members of your current Wi-Fi
group. Users must be on the same
Wi-Fi and provide an access code to
join the group.
AllShare Cast
(with Hub
accessory)
This feature functions with an
external AllShareCast Hub to fully
mirror what is currently displayed on
your device to the external TV.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
123
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung
account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Samsung Link
.
3. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no
Wi-Fi detected, tap
Cancel
(to continue by using your
network connection) or
Connect
to continue.
4. Tap
Sign in
.
5. If prompted to log into your Samsung account, tap
Sign
in
and follow the on-screen instructions.
Note:
If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the
application and restart it.
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.
7. Tap to reveal the DEVICES & STORAGE list,
scroll down the screen. The DEVICES & STORAGE list
contains two separate streaming media options:
• Registered devices
allows you to stream/share selected
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.
•Registered storage
: allows you to receive and playback media
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming
content.
Configuring Samsung Link Settings
The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and
external device acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Samsung Link
.
2. Press and then tap
Settings
and configure the
following settings as desired:
•Registered storage
: allows you to add a Web storage location.
Without a storage service/location added, you cannot use
Samsung Link.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 124
•Save to
: allows you to save your media to your internal phone
memory or to an SD card.
• Auto upload
: allows you to enable automatic upload of images
from your device to those storage locations specified within the
Web storage list. Move the slider to the on position to activate
the feature.
• Video optimization
: allows you to setup the video quality for
streamed video content. Move the slider to the on position to
activate the feature.
•Password lock
: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated
Samsung account password. Move the slider to the on position
to activate the feature.
•My account
: displays Samsung account information.
• Customer support
: allows you to contact the Samsung Link
team via a new email from an available email account.
• About this service
: displays application information.
Setting Up Web Storage
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store
your files and share them on the “Cloud”.
Note:
If you are using another Web storage service, log into
that service first before using Samsung Link.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Samsung Link
.
2. Tap ➔
Add storage
.
Note:
When adding storage, an N Drive is added.
3. Choose from: SugarSync, Dropbox, or SkyDrive.
– or –
Press and then tap
Settings
➔
Registered storage
➔
Add storage
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into
your cloud service.
5. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web
storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area
of the main screen.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
125
6. From the main screen, select a connected device and
then tap on the media that you would like to share.
•
A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
To de-register Web storage service:
1. From the Samsung Link application, press and
then tap
Settings
➔
Registered storage
.
2. Select
Delete
➔
Delete
.
3. Select a current storage service and tap
OK
.
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target
Device
Important!
Make sure all communicating devices are
connected to the same Wi-Fi.
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target
device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Samsung Link
.
Note:
You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before
you can use this feature.
3. Tap and select your device name from the
Registered devices
area.
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,
Files, or Info) and select a file.
•
A file with in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your
device to access the file currently stored on your services’
servers.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 126
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to
place a green check mark alongside it.
6. Tap
Stream to connected devices
and select an
available target device to begin streaming.
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the
on-screen
Allow
button to continue.
Note:
At this stage your device is requesting access to share
media with the external source.
8. Confirm
Samsung Link Controller enabled
appears in the Notification area at the top of the device
to indicate you are using your device as the media
source.
Scrapbook
This application allows you to combine documents, images,
and music into a digital scrapbook.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Scrapbook
.
2. Tap
Start
and follow the on-screen tutorials.
Settings
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Settings
.
– or –
From the Home screen press and then tap
Settings
.
For more information, refer to “Changing Your Settings” on
page 238.
Setup Wizard
???
SketchBook for Galaxy
This application allows you to explore your imagination
through sketches using Autodesk SketchBook application
and S Pen.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Galaxy Plus
➔
SketchBook for Galaxy
.
2. Follow the on-screen tutorials.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
127
Slacker
???
Story Album
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your
story in media. Special moments display on a timeline, and if
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Story Album
.
2. Read the introductory information and tap
Next
.
3. Tap
Start
to begin your Story Album.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Press and then tap
Help
for additional
information.
TripAdvisor
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Galaxy Plus
➔
TripAdvisor
.
2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not
already done so.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.
4. Press for additional options.
Verizon Tones
???
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 128
Video
The Video player application plays video files stored locally.
Using Video
The Video application plays video files stored on the SD card.
This device is able to playback DivX videos.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
(
Video
). A list of available videos displays in the
Video list.
2. Tap a video file to begin viewing.
Sharing Videos
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
(
Video
). After a few seconds, each
on-screen video begins to cycle through a preview of
the first five seconds of the clip.
2. Press and then tap
Share via
.
3. Select either individual videos or tap
Select all
.
4. Press and then tap
Done
to complete the process
or
Cancel
to quit.
5. Select a sharing option. Choose from: Add to Dropbox,
Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Evernote - Create Note,
Gmail, Google+, Messages, Picassa, S Note,
Scrapbook, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.
Additional Video Features
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Video
.
2. Press and then tap an available option:
•Sort by
: allows you to sort current videos by TItle, Date, Size,
or Type.
•View as
: allows you to display the on-scren video images as
either a List, Thumbnail, or Folders.
•Share via
: allows you to share a selected video with external
sources.
• Delete
: allows you to delete selected videos.
•Edit
: allows you to edit a selected video file.
• Auto play next
: sllows you to play videos consecutively. Once a
video ends, the next available video begins to play.
• Information
: provides on-screen information about the
application.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
129
• Settings
: allows you to configure application functions such as:
Default storage, Auto update apps, and About services.
•Help
: displays an on-screen set of application-related Help
topics.
Using Picture-In-Picture
This feature can be used during playback of supported video
types via either the Gallery, Play Videos, or Video player.
Note:
Some applications might not allow this video to remain
active in the foreground (ex: Camera/Camcorder
screen).
This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a
background operation while you multi-task and do other
things, such as surf the Internet, access your Contacts list,
look for a picture, etc..
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
.
2. Tap the desired video playback application.
3. Tap the desired video to begin playback.
Note:
The Picture-In-Picture feature only works when using
the Video player application. Other video players (ex:
YouTube), do not support this feature.
4. As playback is initiated, locate and tap
Picture-in-Picture
from the bottom-right of the
playback screen. Your current video is then sent to
foreground of any new page and most application
screens.
5. The video disappears from the screen once it ends.
DivX Overview
This device is able to playback DivX videos. DivX Certified®
to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium
content. If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for
your device, the message “Authorization Error” displays and
your content does not play. Learn more at
www.divx.com/vod
.
Your device must first be registered to playback protected or
purchased DivX content. DRM-free or unprotected content
does not required DivX VOD registration.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 130
Locating Your VOD Registration Number
1. From the main
Settings
page, tap
More
tab ➔
About
device
➔
Legal information
➔
License settings
➔
DivX® VOD
➔
Register
.
2. Write down your Registration code.
3. Tap
OK
.
Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of
Purchased Movies
To play purchased DivX movies on your device, you will first
need to complete a one-time registration using both your
device and your computer.
1. Write down the DivX registration code that appears
on-screen. Copy this 8 or 10-digit number down.
2. Verify you have the latest DivX software running on
your computer. Download the free player (for your
computer) from
www.divx.com
.
3. Open the DivX Player on your computer and from
within the
VOD
menu, select
Register a DivX Certified
Device.
.
4. You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if
your account information has not already been saved in
DivX Player.
5. Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the
registration code from step 2 and create a device
nickname (ex: “Aaron or Aaron’s Device”).
6. Select a location on your computer to download the
DivX registration video with the same title as your
device nickname (ex: Aaron.divx).
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the file
and initiate the transfer process. You will need to place
this video file onto your device and play it back.
8. Connect your device to the computer via USB and
transfer this video.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
131
9. From the
Registration
screen (Transfer), click Transfer
Video now and select the location of the microSD card
or
USB
(the device) as the target destination for the
registration video (created in step 6) and click
Start
.
– or –
Locate the created file, copy and paste it into the new
drive letter corresponding to your device’s storage
location.
10. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
My Files
.
11. Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file
to play it. Once you play the registration file on your
device, your registration is complete.
12. Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen (from within
your computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your
computer and your new device appears in the list of
registered DivX devices.
Important!
There is no special registration or configuration
necessary to playback DRM-free DivX movies.
Registration of your device is only required for
playback of protected DivX material.
Viewdini
???
Voicemail
???
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 132
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to
one minute long and then immediately send it as a message.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
Voice Recorder
.
2. Following are the playback controls:
3. From the Recorded files page, press and then
select one of the following:
•Share via
and select a method in which to share this audio file.
Selections are: Add to Dropbox, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email,
Evernote - Create Note, Gmail, Messages, or Wi-Fi Direct.
Refer to each specific section, depending on the method you
selected to send this voice recording.
• Delete
: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap
the recordings to delete and tap
Delete
.
• Change category
: allows you to assign the currently selected
recording to a user-created category entry.
•Sort by
: allows you to sort the current list by either: Date (most
recent), Date (oldest), Name, or Category.
•Search
: allows you to search for key terms within the existing
list.
• Manage categories
: allows you to existing user-created
category entries.
Record
to record an audio file.
Stop
to stop recording. The file automatically
saves to the Voice list.
Pause
to pause the recording of an audio file.
Cancel
to cancel the recording of an audio file.
Bookmark
to bookmark the current recording.
List
to display a list of current recordings.
Recording quality
to adjust the recording
quality. Choose from: Normal or High quality
recording.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
133
• Settings
: the following settings are available:
–
Storage
: allows you to choose where your recordings are
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.
–
Recording quality
: allows you to set the recording quality to
High or Normal.
–
Contextual filename
: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to
adjust the filename based on contextual information such as
your current GPS location.
–
Default name
: allows you to choose the name prefix for your
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,
etc.
–
Noise reduction
: allows you to activate/deactivate background
noise suppression.
–
Logo display
: allows you to display a custom logo on the
recording screen.
–
Language
: allows you to select an available language for use
with the voice memos.
–
Channel
: allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono
or Stereo.
–
Skip interval
: allows you to assign a skip length.
•End
: allows you to exit the application.
Voice Search
Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice
to text Internet searching.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Google
➔
Voice Search
.
2. When prompted, speak into the built-in microphone.
3. Use the on-screen options to find a matching search
term.
VZ Navigator
???
VZ Security
???
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 134
WatchON
Important!
Before initiating use, verify you have an active
Internet connection available (either mobile
network or Wi-Fi connection).
Note:
Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,
confirm your TV is turned off.
Using WatchON
For more information, refer to
www.samsungwatchon.com
.
Initial Configuration
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
WatchON
.
Note:
If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile
network. Click
Connect
to proceed.
3. Select your desired country for your TV Guide’s source
listing and tap
Next
.
4. Enter your current zip code and tap
Done
. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
5. From the
Find your TV service
screen, select a service
provider from the available channel listing.
6. From the
Personalize
screen, you can either follow the
on-screen prompts to personalize your desired content
or tap
Skip
to continue without customizing your
content.
7. Read the on-screen Peel Disclaimer agreement and tap
Agree
to complete the set up process.
Customizing Your Remote
1. From the top of the main screen, tap
Remote
Control
➔
Set Up Now
.
2. From the
Select your TV brand
screen, tap your TV’s
manufacturer name.
•
If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,
select from one of the following two options. Choose from
either
Other TV Brands
or
I Have a Projector
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
135
3. Aim your device at the TV and tap
Power
to
confirm the set up process completed successfully and
the correct TV IR codes were selected.
Note:
The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10
seconds. Please do not press the button again.
4. If the TV turned on, tap
Yes, this code works
.
– or –
If the TV did not turn on after tapping
Power
and
waiting 10 seconds, tap
No, test next code
or
Send this code again
.
5. From the
Select your channel source
screen, select the
entry that corresponds to your current channel control
method:
• Set-top Box
: selected when changing channels is done via a
receiver box. Channels are not changed via the TV remote but
rather through the receiver/box.
• My xxx TV
: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.
Note:
Try matching your current channel selection method.
6. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.
For example, DirectTV®.
•
If your brand does not display in the list, tap
Show other
brands
and follow the on-screen instructions.
Important!
You must configure your set top box for IR
communication with your device. If you do not
select
More Info..
below and follow the on-screen
instructions you may not be able to properly use
the application.
7. When prompted to Enable IR, tap
More Info
to learn
how to configure your set top box to receive and
respond to IR controls.
8. Only after completing the IR setup process and
programming your box, press (
Back
).
Note:
This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time
process and once successful should not need repeating.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 136
9. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the
on-screen instructions.
Using WatchON
To change channels:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
Samsung
➔
WatchON
.
3. From the top of the main screen, tap (
Remote
Control
). This launches an on-screen set of remote
control tabs. Choose from one of the following:
• Easy remote
: provides the most common used control
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.
4. Tap the bottom of the screen to access additional
remote tabs Choose from one of the following:
•TV
: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.
• [Set top box]
: displays customized control specific to your
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control
functions.
5. From the remote screen press and then
tap (
Change Room
) to choose from different
receivers/boxes in different rooms. Ex: Living Room
box, Bedroom box, etc..
6. Press (
Back
) to return to the main menu.
Locating your favorite programming:
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap
Combined
View
to reveal available media categories.
3. Select an available category.
– or –
Tap
Channel Guide
to display on your TV an on-screen
listing of available set top box shows.
For additional information on the WatchON application,
press and then select
Help
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
137
WatchOn Settings
From the main WatchON screen, press and then
select an available on-screen option:
• Change Room
: allows you to select a previously configured
room.
• Edit channels
: allows you to add or remove channels from
your custom list. Press and hold a channel number to update
the channel entry.
• Settings
: provides access to the Samsung WatchON settings
menu.
• About
: displays on-screen information about the application.
•Help
: displays on-screen help information.
Personalize WatchON
You can personalize your application to do things such as
show content only from your selected media categories, or
add an additional room’s set top box.
To configure your Just for you settings:
The Just for you option displays available content matching
your activated media categories. These categories can be
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap
Combined
View
➔
Just for you
.
3. From the
On TV
tab, press and then select
Settings
.
4. Access parameters such as
Basic info
,
Genres
and
Sports
to then configure and enable those parameters
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Applications 138
To add a new room:
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do
the same.
1. Sign into your Samsung account.
2. From the main WatchON screen, tap the
On TV
tab
3. Press and then select
Settings
➔
Add room
.
4. Name the new room and tap
Next
.
5. Enter your current zip code and tap
Done
. This zip code
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and
set top box.
Follow the steps from page 134 to complete the process.
YouTube
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can
upload and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
From the Home screen, tap
Apps
➔
YouTube
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
139
Section 7: Connections
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides
access to local area networks.
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wi-Fi
network. Wi-Fi networks can be Open (unsecured), or
Secured (requiring you to provide login credentials).
Your device supports the 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi protocols.
Configuring Wi-Fi Settings
Configure your device’s Wi-Fi settings. For more information,
see “Wi-Fi Settings” on page 153.
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn Wi-
Fi service on, your device automatically searches for nearby
available Wi-Fi networks.
Tip:
When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically
searches for available networks and displays them.
You can also turn Wi-Fi On or Off from Settings.
1. From the Home screen, sweep your finger downward
to display Notifications.
2. If Wi-Fi is not already on, touch
Wi-Fi
Off
to turn on
Wi-Fi.
– or –
Touch
Wireless network available
to launch Wi-Fi
settings, then touch
Wi-Fi
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Connections 140
Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available
Wi-Fi connections, then displays them.
1. From the Home screen, sweep your finger downward
to display Notifications.
2. If Wi-Fi is not already on, touch
Wi-Fi
Off
to turn on
Wi-Fi.
– or –
Touch
Wireless network available
to launch Wi-Fi
settings, then touch
Wi-Fi
.
3. When your device completes a scan, touch a Wi-Fi
network to connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, you
will be automatically connected. If the Wi-Fi network is
secured, enter the password at the prompt to connect.
Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually
1. From the Home screen, sweep your finger downward
to display Notifications.
2. If Wi-Fi is not already on, touch
Wi-Fi
Off
to turn on
Wi-Fi.
– or –
Touch
Wireless network available
to launch Wi-Fi
settings, then touch
Wi-Fi
.
3. On the pop-up Wi-Fi settings screen, touch
Add
Network
(below the scanned networks), then enter
these fields:
• Network Name (SSID)
: Enter the name of the Wi-Fi network.
•Security
: Select the type of security used by the Wi-Fi network.
•Password
: If the network is secured, enter the password.
4. Touch
Connect
to save the settings and connect to the
network now, or
Save
to save the network settings for
future use.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
141
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a standard that allows devices to connect to
each other directly via Wi-Fi, without a Wi-Fi network or
hotspot, and without having to set up the connection. This
type of connection is commonly called peer-to-peer.
For example, your device can use Wi-Fi Direct to share
photos, contacts and other content with other Wi-Fi Direct
devices. Many of the apps on your device provide options for
sharing via Wi-Fi Direct under
Menu
.
Turning Wi-Fi Direct On or Off
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
.
2. Touch
Wi-Fi Direct
to turn Wi-Fi Direct On or
Off.
Connecting to Wi-Fi Direct Devices
1. First, enable Wi-Fi Direct on your device. From the
Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
, then touch
Wi-Fi Direct
.
2. Enable Wi-Fi Direct on the other device(s). Consult the
other device’s documentation for more information.
3. On your device, touch
Wi-Fi Direct
to scan for the other
device(s).
4. In the scanned list, touch a device to connect with it, or
touch
Multi-connect
to connect to multiple devices (not
all devices support multi-connect).
5. Follow the prompts on both devices to complete the
connection.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Connections 142
Mobile Hotspot
Use Mobile Hotspot to share your device’s internet
connection with a PC or other device through Wi-Fi, using
your device as the mobile hotspot.
Note:
Mobile Hotspot may require a subscription to Mobile
Hotspot/Mobile Broadband Connect service. Contact
Verizon Wireless for more information.
Mobile Hotspot consumes battery power and uses data
service. While the Mobile Hotspot is active, your device’s
applications will use the Mobile Hotspot data allowance.
Configuring Mobile Hotspot Settings
Configure your device’s Mobile Hotspot settings, including
your device’s name and password, and set the visibility of
your device’s Wi-Fi hotspot.
For more information, see “Configuring Mobile Hotspot” on
page 159.
Turning Mobile Hotspot On or Off
Activate your device’s Mobile Hotspot application to allow
other devices to use your device’s internet connection.
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
2. Touch
Mobile Hotspot
to turn the hotspot On or
Off.
Tip:
By default, your device’s mobile hotspot has no security
applied, and any device can connect. For more
information about configuring your mobile hotspot, see
“Configuring Mobile Hotspot” on page 159.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
143
Connecting a Device via Mobile Hotspot
Use the other device’s Wi-Fi control to connect to your
device’s Mobile Hotspot.
1. Turn on Mobile Hotspot on your device. For more
information, see “Turning Mobile Hotspot On or Off” on
page 142.
2. Activate Wi-Fi on the device, using the device’s Wi-Fi
control.
3. Scan for Wi-Fi hotspots, and select your device from
the list. To find your device’s name, see “Configuring
Mobile Hotspot” on page 159.
4. At the prompt, enter your device’s Mobile Hotspot
password. By default, the password is your device’s
telephone number. For more information, see
“Configuring Mobile Hotspot” on page 159.
Allowed Device List
Control whether devices connect to your Mobile Hotspot with
the Allowed device list. After you add devices to the list, they
can scan for your device and connect using your device’s
mobile hotspot name and password.
Note:
Using your device as a mobile hotspot consumes battery
power and uses data service. While Mobile Hotspot is
active, your device’s applications will use the Mobile
Hotspot data service. Roaming while using your device
as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges.
1. From the Home screen, select
Apps
➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
2. Touch
Allowed devices
, then touch the button at the top
of the screen to enter the other device’s Device name
and MAC address.
3. Touch
OK
to add the device to the Allowed devices list.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Connections 144
Bluetooth
Note:
For Hearing Aid Compatibility Information, see page 226.
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications
technology for exchanging information over a distance of
about 30 feet. You don’t need to line up the devices to send
information with Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you
can exchange information between them, even if they are in
different rooms.
Your device can use Bluetooth to share photos, contacts and
other content with other Bluetooth devices. Many of the apps
on your device provide options for sharing via Bluetooth
under
Menu
.
Configuring Bluetooth Settings
Configure your device’s Bluetooth settings. For more
information, see “Bluetooth settings” on page 156.
Note:
Bluetooth profiles are specifications for services
supported by individual devices. For a list of profiles your
device supports, see “Bluetooth profiles” on page 155.
Turning Bluetooth On or Off
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
.
2. Touch
Bluetooth
to turn Bluetooth On or Off.
Tip:
You can also turn Bluetooth On or Off on Notifications.
From almost any unlocked screen, sweep your finger
down from the Status bar to display Notifications.
Pairing with a Bluetooth Device
Search for a Bluetooth device and pair with it, to exchange
information between your device and the target device.
After pairing, your device and the target device will recognize
each other and exchange information without a passcode or
PIN.
Note:
When paired, the
Bluetooth paired
icon displays in
the Status Bar. If you receive a new request for pairing
while paired with a Bluetooth headset, a new Bluetooth
icon displays at the left of the Status bar and
Notifications displays the pairing request.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
145
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
Bluetooth
.
2. Touch
Bluetooth
to turn Bluetooth On.
3. Activate the target device’s discoverable mode.
4. Touch
Scan
.
5. From the list of scanned devices, touch the target
device, then follow the prompts to complete the
pairing:
•
If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target
device and touch
OK
. When prompted, enter the PIN on the
target device.
•
If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device will
attempt to pair with the device automatically. Follow the
prompts on your device and the target device to complete the
pairing.
VPN
You can use your device’s VPN (Virtual Private Network)
feature to connect to VPNs.
Configuring VPN Settings
Configure your device’s VPN settings. For more information,
see “Nearby devices” on page 162.
Note:
You must enable at least Pattern security before setting
up a VPN. If you have not yet enabled security, you’ll be
prompted to do so the first time you launch VPN
settings.
Adding a VPN
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
VPN
.
2. Touch
Add VPN network
to set up a connection to a
VPN. Available settings depend on the type of VPN.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Connections 146
Tethering
Use Tethering to share your device’s internet connection with
a computer that connects to your device via USB cable, or by
Bluetooth.
Touch
Help
under Tethering settings to view information
about tethering, and for links to more information.
Note:
Mobile Broadband Connect may require a subscription
to Mobile Hotspot/Mobile Broadband Connect service.
Contact Verizon Wireless for more information. Mobile
Hotspot consumes battery power and uses data service.
While the Mobile Hotspot is active, your device’s
applications will use the Mobile Hotspot data allowance.
Mobile Broadband Connect
Use Mobile Broadband Connect to share your device’s
network connection with a computer that connects to your
device via USB cable.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Tethering
.
2. Connect the other device to your device via USB cable.
3. Touch
Mobile Broadband connect
to turn tethering On or
Off.
Bluetooth tethering
Before starting, pair your computer with your device, then
configure your computer to obtain its network connection via
Bluetooth.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Tethering
.
2. Connect the other device to your device via USB cable.
3. Touch
Bluetooth tethering
to turn tethering On or Off.
Important!
Tethering consumes battery power and increases
your data usage. Roaming while using tethering
will incur extra data charges.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
147
NFC and Beaming
Use NFC (Near Field Communication) to share information
between your device and another NFC device by beaming,
typically by touching the devices together back-to-back.
Your device uses NFC for the S Beam feature. NFC must be
turned on to use S Beam.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
.
2. Touch
NFC
to turn NFC On or Off.
Note:
NFC must be turned on to use S Beam.
S Beam
Share more and share it faster with S Beam. From photos to
documents, large video files to maps, you can share almost
anything instantly with one touch, simply by placing your
devices back-to-back.
S Beam uses your device’s NFC (Near Field Communication)
feature to send, or “beam”, content to other NFC and Wi-Fi
Direct devices, by holding the devices close together.
S Beam works in the background. Use the sharing options
from your favorite apps to select content to share via
S Beam. For example, you can beam pictures or videos from
Gallery, or songs from Music player. Just bring the devices
together (typically back-to-back), then tap the screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
.
2. Touch
NFC
to turn NFC On. NFC must be turned On to
use S Beam.
3. Touch
S Beam
, then touch to turn S Beam On
or Off.
Note:
If you turn on S Beam, NFC is automatically turned On.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Connections 148
Nearby devices
Share files with nearby devices using DLNA (Digital Living
Network Alliance) standards, over Wi-Fi.
To share with nearby devices, you must connect to a Wi-Fi
network. The devices you wish to share files with must also
be connected to the same Wi-Fi network and must support
DLNA.
Important!
Use care when enabling file sharing for nearby
devices. When enabled, other devices can access
data on your device.
Turning File sharing On or Off
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Nearby Devices
.
2. Touch
File sharing
to turn sharing On or Off.
Configuring File Sharing
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Nearby Devices
.
2. Under
Advanced
, touch options to control how content
is shared from your device:
• Shared contents
: Choose the type of content to share, from
Videos
,
Photos
, or
Music
.
•Device name
: View or modify your device’s name.
• Allowed devices list
: View and manage devices allowed to
connect to your device.
• Not-allowed devices list
: View and manage devices restricted
from connecting to your device.
• Download to
: Choose a location to save downloaded content,
from USB storage (device memory) or SD card.
• Upload from other devices
: Choose how to handle incoming
files from other devices, from
Always accept
,
Always ask
, or
Always reject
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
149
Connecting to a Computer
Connect your device to a computer to transfer data between
your device and the computer. Use the USB cable that comes
with your device, or use one of the pre-loaded apps on your
device to connect wirelessly.
Transferring Data
Connect your device to a computer, via USB cable, to transfer
data as a Media device using MTP (Media Transfer Protocol),
or as a Camera using PTP (Photo Transfer Protocol).
1. Attach your device to the computer with a USB data
cable. Your device recognizes the connection as the
last connection method you used, and displays a
connection
alert in the Status bar and Notifications.
2. From the Home screen, sweep your finger downward
to display Notifications, then touch the alert.
3. Select a connection method:
• Media device (MTP)
: Transfer media files with Windows, or
using Android file transfer on a Mac (see
www.android.com/
filetransfer
).
•Camera (PTP)
: Transfer photos using camera software, and
transfer files to computers that do not support MTP.
4. On your computer, choose a method for accessing your
device. Available options depend on the programs
installed on your computer.
5. Transfer files to the memory card. When finished, you
can disconnect the USB cable.
Kies air
Manage content saved on your device via your desktop or
mobile browser using Wi-Fi technology. The pre-loaded Kies
air app connects via Wi-Fi to the Kies application, which you
can install on your computer.
For more information, visit:
www. samsung.com/us/kies
Note:
To sync your device to a PC, it is highly recommended
that you install Samsung Kies, which is available at
http://www.samsung.com/kies
(for Windows/Mac).
Note:
If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your
computer.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Connections 150
Memory Card
Your device supports removable microSD™ or microSDHC™
memory cards of up to 64GB capacity, for storage of music,
pictures, videos, and other files.
By default, files that you download, or that you create with
your device, such as pictures and videos you capture with
Camera, are stored to your device’s memory. For more
storage capacity, you can set the memory card as the
primary storage location for apps with the app’s options.
For more information about viewing memory usage for the
memory card, see “SD card” on page 173.
Installing and Removing a Memory Card
For more information about installing and removing a
memory card, see “Memory Card” on page 15.
Important!
To prevent damage to data stored on the memory
card, unmount the card before removing it from the
device.
Mounting and Unmounting a Memory Card
Mounting a memory card establishes the connection
between your device and the card, to prepare for saving files
to the memory card. In most cases, the device mounts the
card automatically when you install it, and displays the
memory card status on Notifications.
Before removing the card, use the Mount/Unmount setting to
unmount, it to prevent damage to data stored on the card.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Touch
Unmount SD card
, then follow the prompts.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
151
Formatting a Memory Card
Use the Format SD card setting to remove all data from an
installed memory card.
Important!
Data cannot be recovered after formatting.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Touch
Format SD card
, then follow the prompts to
confirm the deletion of data from the card.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 152
Section 8: Settings
Accessing Settings
From the Home screen
Touch
Apps
➔
Settings
.
– or –
Touch
Menu
, then select
Settings
.
From Notifications
Touch and drag down from the top of the screen to
display notifications, then touch .
Wireless and network
Airplane mode
When airplane mode is enabled, all your device’s wireless
connections are disabled, and you cannot make or receive
calls or messages or connect to networks. While in airplane
mode, you can use other features of your device, such as
playing music, watching videos, or other applications.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
.
2. Touch
Airplane mode
to enable or disable airplane
mode.
Note:
Airplane mode can also be controlled from Notifications,
and from Device options when you press and hold the
Power/Lock Key
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
153
Device
Wi-Fi
Set up and manage your device’s connections to Wi-Fi
networks. Your device supports Wi-Fi a/b/g/n.
For more information about using Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi” on
page 139.
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off
Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn Wi-
Fi service on, your device automatically searches for
available Wi-Fi networks.
Tip:
You can also turn Wi-Fi On or Off from Notifications.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
.
2. Touch
Wi-Fi
to turn Wi-Fi On or Off.
Wi-Fi Settings
Set up and manage wireless access points.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Touch
Wi-Fi
to turn Wi-Fi On. Wi-Fi must be
turned on to configure settings.
3. Touch settings to configure:
•Notify me
: When enabled, your device notifies you of Wi-Fi
networks when you launch a high data-usage application.
•Add Wi-Fi Network
: Connect to a new Wi-Fi network. For
more information, see
“Adding a Wi-Fi Network
Manually”
on page 140.
•Scan
: Search for available Wi-Fi networks.
• Wi-Fi Direct
: Configure Wi-Fi Direct.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 154
Other Wi-Fi settings
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi
.
2. Touch
Menu
for additional settings:
• Advanced:
–
Auto-connect
: When enabled, your device will automatically
connect to known Wi-Fi networks when you launch a high data-
usage application, even if Wi-Fi is turned off. A known
Wi-Fi network is one that you previously added.
–
Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep
: Specify when to switch from
Wi-Fi to mobile data for data communications, when the device
goes to sleep (when the backlight goes out). This setting can
affect your data usage, and the behavior of devices you connect
to your device, such as when tethering or using Mobile Hotspot.
–
Check for Internet service
: When enabled, your device will
check for Wi-Fi Internet service when connected to a Wi-Fi
access point.
–
MAC address
: (Not configurable) View your device’s MAC
address, needed for connecting to some secured networks.
–
IP address
:
(Not configurable) View your device’s IP address.
• Manage networks
: View and manage your saved Wi-Fi
networks. Touch a network to connect to it, or to forget or
modify its settings.
• WPS push button
: Set up a connection to a WPS (Wi-Fi
Protected Setup) router or equipment.
• WPS PIN entry
: View the PIN used by your device to set up a
PIN-secured connection to a Wi-Fi router.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
155
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct allows devices to connect to each other directly
via Wi-Fi, without a Wi-Fi network or hotspot, and without
having to set up the connection. For example, your device
can use Wi-Fi Direct to share photos, contacts and other
content with other Wi-Fi Direct devices.
For more information, see “Wi-Fi Direct” on page 141.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Wi-Fi.
2. Touch
Wi-Fi Direct
at the bottom of the screen. Your
device automatically scans for nearby Wi-Fi Direct
devices, or you can touch
Scan
to start scanning.
3. After scanning for devices, select a device, then follow
the prompts to complete the connection.
– or –
Touch
Multi-connect
to create a connection to devices
that support multi-connect. Touch
Scan
to search for
available multi-connect devices, then select the
devices and follow the prompts to complete the
connection.
Bluetooth
Your device supports Bluetooth® 4.0.
Bluetooth profiles
Bluetooth profiles are specifications for services supported
by individual devices. Profiles improve the ability of different
devices to work together. Your device supports these
Bluetooth profiles:
•
Headset
: HSP v1.2 profile supports use of compatible Bluetooth
headsets for mono voice.
•
Handsfree
: HFP v1.5 profile supports Bluetooth headsets, and
may also support other compatible Bluetooth devices with
speakerphone capabilities.
•
Serial Port
: SPP profile supports connections as a serial port.
•
Stereo
: A2DP v1.2, AVRCP v1.3, GAVDP 1.0, AVCTP 1.3 and
AVDTP 1.2 profiles support delivery of stereo audio to compatible
Bluetooth devices.
•
Object Exchange
: OPP v1.0 profile allows sending and receiving
of contact name cards (vCard 2.1) and calendar events
(vCalendar) between devices. PBAP v1.2 supports exchange of
Phone Book Objects.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 156
•
Human Interface Devices
: HID v1.0 profile supports certain
interface devices.
•
Personal Area Network
: PAN 1.0 supports exchange of data with
other devices.
•
Message Access Profile
: MAP 1.0 allows exchange of SMS
messages between devices, such as with an automotive hands-
free device.
Note:
This device does not support all Bluetooth profiles.
For vehicle/accessory compatibility, visit
www.verizonwireless.com/bluetoothchart.
Turning Bluetooth On or Off
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
.
2. Touch
Bluetooth
to turn Bluetooth On or Off.
Tip:
You can also turn Bluetooth On or Off at Notifications.
Bluetooth settings
Pair with other Bluetooth devices, manage your Bluetooth
connections, and control your device’s visibility to other
devices.
Note:
Bluetooth must be turned On to access Bluetooth
settings.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Bluetooth
.
2. Touch a setting to configure Bluetooth:
•
Touch
to turn Bluetooth On or Off.
•
Touch your device’s name to control its visibility to other
devices’ Bluetooth searches. Available when Bluetooth is
turned On.
•
Touch a paired device to connect to it, or touch beside the
device to change its settings.
•
Touch
Scan
to search for visible Bluetooth devices. After
searching, touch a device to pair with it. For more information,
see
“Pairing with a Bluetooth Device”
on page 144.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
157
Data usage
Monitor data usage, control your device’s connection to
mobile data service.
Note:
Data usage is measured by your device, and your
service provider may account for usage differently, so
consider using a conservative limit.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Data usage
.
2. Configure options:
•Mobile data
:
Turn Mobile data On or Off. You can also control
Mobile Data at Notifications.
• Limit mobile data usage
: When enabled, your mobile data
connection will be disabled when the specified limit is reached.
After enabling the setting, drag the red limit line on the graph
below to set the data usage limit.
• Alert me about data usage
: When enabled, your device will
alert you when mobile data usage reaches the warning limit
you set. After enabling the setting, drag the orange warning line
on the graph below to set the data usage warning limit.
Data usage options
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Data usage
.
2. Touch
Menu
to set options:
• Data roaming
: Turn data roaming On or Off. When roaming,
your device connects to networks outside your home network,
depending on your provider’s agreements with other providers.
Using data while roaming can incur extra charges, depending
on your plan. For more information, contact Verizon Wireless.
• Restrict background data
: Your device can connect to the
network in the background, for synchronization or other
services. When enabled, background connections will not
occur.
• Auto sync data
: When enabled, your device will synchronize
with accounts automatically, at any time.
•Show Wi-Fi usage
: When turned On, a separate tab displays
data usage while connected to Wi-Fi.
• Mobile hotspots
: Select Wi-Fi networks that are mobile
hotspots. You can restrict apps from using these networks, and
you can configure apps to warn you before using these
networks for large downloads.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 158
More Wireless and Network Settings
Mobile networks
Set options for network selection and data service.
Important!
Depending on your service plan, changes you
make to mobile networks settings may incur extra
charges. Consult Verizon Wireless for information.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Set these options:
• Mobile data
: Enable or disable your device’s connection to the
mobile data network. You can also control this setting at
Notifications with the Mobile data toggle.
• Global Data Roaming
Access
: Enable or disable connection to
data services when your device is roaming on another network.
•Roaming
: (Not configurable) Current roaming status.
• Signal strength
: (Not configurable) Current signal strength.
•Network mode
: Choose a preferred network mode.
• Access Point Names
: Configure wireless network access.
• Network operators
: Configure network operators.
Mobile Hotspot
Use Mobile Hotspot to share your device’s internet
connection with other devices, through Wi-Fi. You can
connect up to 5 other devices in 3G, or 10 in 4G.
You can control whether devices connect to your Mobile
Hotspot with the Allowed device list.
For more information about using your device as a mobile
hotspot, see “Mobile Hotspot” on page 142. You can also
access Mobile Hotspot with the
Mobile Hotspot
app.
Note:
Mobile Hotspot may require a subscription to Mobile
Hotspot/Mobile Broadband Connect service. For more
information, contact Verizon Wireless.
Using your device as a mobile hotspot consumes battery
power and uses data service. While Mobile Hotspot is
active, your device’s applications will use the Mobile
Hotspot data service. Roaming while using your device
as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
159
Turning Mobile Hotspot On or Off
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
.
2. Touch
Mobile Hotspot
to turn Mobile Hotspot
On or Off.
Note:
Using your device as a mobile hotspot consumes battery
power and uses data service. While Mobile Hotspot is
active, your device’s applications will use the Mobile
Hotspot data service. Roaming while using your device
as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges.
Configuring Mobile Hotspot
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Mobile Hotspot
.
2. Touch
Configure
for these options:
• Network SSID
: View and change the name of your mobile
hotspot.
• Hide my device
: When enabled, your mobile hotspot is not
visible to other Wi-Fi devices during a scan. Other devices can
still connect to your mobile hotspot, but will have to set up the
connection manually with your Network SSID and Password.
• Security
: Choose the security level for your Mobile Hotspot.
• Password
: If you choose a security level that uses a password,
enter the password. By default, the password is your mobile
telephone number.
• Show password
: Enable to make the Password field visible.
• Show advanced options
: Enable to access advanced options,
including Broadcast channel, to specify the channel your device
uses for Mobile Hotspot.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 160
Allowed Devices
Control whether devices connect to your Mobile Hotspot with
the Allowed devices list. After you add devices to the list,
they can scan for your device and connect using your
device’s mobile hotspot name and password.
Note:
Using your device as a mobile hotspot consumes battery
power and uses data service. While Mobile Hotspot is
active, your device’s applications will use the Mobile
Hotspot data service. Roaming while using your device
as a mobile hotspot will incur extra data charges.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Mobile Hotspot
➔
Allowed devices
.
2. Touch , then enter the other device’s Device name
and MAC address.
3. Touch
to add the device to the
Allowed devices
list.
Tip:
For information about connecting to your Mobile Hotspot,
see “Connecting a Device via Mobile Hotspot” on
page 143.
Tethering
Use Tethering to share your device’s internet connection with
a computer that connects to your device via USB cable, or by
Bluetooth.
For more information about connecting computers to your
device via Tethering, see “Tethering” on page 146.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Tethering
.
2. Choose a tethering method:
• Mobile Broadband Connect
: Connect the computer to the
device via USB cable, then touch
Mobile Broadband Connect
to turn tethering On or Off.
• Bluetooth tethering
: Pair your device with the computer via
Bluetooth. Consult the computer’s documentation for more
information about configuring your computer to pair via
Bluetooth. Touch
Bluetooth Tethering
to turn tethering On or
Off.
Note:
Using Mobile Broadband Connect tethering requires a
subscription to Mobile Hotspot/Mobile Broadband
Connect service. For more information, contact Verizon
Wireless.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
161
VPN
Set up and manage Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). For more
information about using VPNs, see “VPN” on page 145.
Note:
You must enable screen security before setting up a
VPN. For information about screen security, see “Screen
lock” on page 177.
Adding a VPN
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
VPN
.
2. Touch
Add VPN network
to set up a connection to a
VPN, using the following settings:
•Name
: Enter a name for the VPN connection.
•Type
: Choose the type of VPN.
• Server address
: Enter the IP address of the VPN server.
• PPP encryption (MPPE)
: Touch to enable or disable
encryption.
• Show advanced options
: Touch to show more options.
Available options depend on the type of VPN you are adding.
NFC
Use NFC (Near Field Communication) to share information
between your device and another NFC device by touching the
devices together, typically back-to-back.
For more information about sharing information with NFC,
see “NFC and Beaming” on page 147.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
.
2. Touch
NFC
to turn NFC On or Off.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 162
S Beam
S Beam uses your device’s NFC (Near Field Communication)
to send, or “beam”, content to other NFC and Wi-Fi Direct
devices, by holding the devices close together.
S Beam works in the background. Use the sharing options
from your favorite apps to select content to share via
S Beam. For example, you can beam pictures or videos from
Gallery, songs from Music player, notes from S Note, and
more. Just bring the devices together (typically back-to-
back), then tap your screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
.
2. Touch
S Beam
to turn S Beam On or Off.
Nearby devices
Share files with devices using DLNA (Digital Living Network
Alliance) standards, over Wi-Fi.
To Nearby devices, you must connect to the same Wi-Fi
network as the devices you which to share with, and the
other devices must support DLNA.
For more information about connecting to Wi-Fi, see “Wi-Fi”
on page 153.
Important!
Use care when enabling file sharing for devices.
When enabled, other devices can access data on
your device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
Nearby devices
.
2. Touch
File sharing
to enable or disable file sharing.
3. Under
Advanced
, touch options to control how content
is shared from your device:
• Shared contents
: Choose the type of content to share, from
Videos
,
Photos
, or
Music
.
•Device name
: View or modify your device’s name.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
163
• Allowed devices list
: View and manage devices allowed to
connect to your device.
• Not-allowed devices list
: View and manage devices restricted
from connecting to your device.
•Download to
: Choose a location to save downloaded content,
from USB storage (device memory) or optional installed SD card
(not included).
• Upload from other devices
: Choose how to handle incoming
files from other devices, from
Always accept
,
Always ask
, or
Always reject
.
AllShare Cast
With AllShare Cast, you can wirelessly share your phone’s
screen with Wi-Fi-enabled TVs using the optional AllShare
Cast Hub accessory (not included).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
More settings
➔
AllShare Cast
.
2. Touch
AllShare Cast
to turn the feature On or
Off.
Note:
For information about connecting to a device, touch
Help
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 164
Device
Home screen mode
Your phone offers two Home screen modes:
•
Starter mode provides an easier experience for the first-time
smartphone user.
•
Standard mode provides a conventional layout for apps and
widgets on the Home screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Home screen mode
.
2. Choose a mode from the pulldown menu, then touch
Apply
.
Sound
Volume
Set the system volume level, and set default volume for call
ringtones, notifications, and media playback.
Note:
You can also set System volume from the Home screen
by pressing the
Volume Key
.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Volume
.
2. Touch and drag the sliders for:
• Music, video, games, and other media
: Set the default
volume level for audio playback. You can also adjust volume
from this default inside the apps.
•Ringtone
: Set the volume for incoming call ringtones.
• Notifications
: Set the volume for notifications, such as new
messages and event reminders.
• System
: Set the volume for all other system sounds, such as
keytones played for screen touches. You can control whether
tones play for screen touches with other sound settings.
3. Touch to save your settings.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
165
Vibration intensity
Set the level for vibration to accompany ringtones and
notifications.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Vibration intensity
.
2. Touch and drag the sliders for:
• Incoming call
: Set the vibration level for incoming call
ringtones.
• Notification
: Set the vibration level for notifications, such as
new messages and event reminders.
• Haptic feedback
: Set the vibration level vibrations to
accompany screen touches.
3. Touch to save your settings.
Device ringtone
Choose a ringtone for incoming calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Device ringtone
.
2. Touch a ringtone to select it. As you touch ringtones, a
sample plays, unless you have Mute or Vibrate mode
enabled.
3. Touch to save your settings.
Tip:
You can also set songs as ringtones for all calls, or for a
selected contact. For more information, see “Setting a
Song as a Ringtone” on page 99.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 166
Device vibration
Choose a vibration pattern to use when vibration is enabled.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Device vibration
.
2. Touch a pattern to select it. As you touch patterns, a
sample plays.
3. To create your own pattern, touch
Create
. Touch
Tap to
create
in the pattern, then touch
Stop
. Touch
Save
to
save your pattern.
4. Touch to save your settings.
Default notifications
Choose a default sound to play for notifications, such as for
new messages and event reminders.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Default notifications
.
2. Touch a sound to select it. As you touch sounds, a
sample plays.
3. Touch to save your settings.
Tip:
You can also set songs as ringtones. For more
information, see “Setting a Song as a Ringtone” on
page 99.
Sound and vibration
When enabled, vibration is played at the same time as
sounds for calls and alerts.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Sound and vibration
.
2. Touch
Sound and vibration
to turn the feature On or Off.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
167
Keytones
Keytones are sounds that play when you touch keys on the
Phone keypad.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Touch
Keytones
to turn key sounds On or Off.
Touch sounds
Touch sounds play when you touch items on the screen, such
as when making a selection.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Touch
Touch sounds
to turn sounds On or Off.
Screen lock sound
Screen lock sound plays when you lock or unlock the screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Touch
Screen lock sounds
to turn sounds On or Off.
Haptic feedback
When turned On, the device vibrates to indicate screen
touches and other interactions.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
.
2. Touch
Haptic feedback
to turn touch vibrations On or
Off.
Emergency tone
You can choose to have a tone play, or have your phone
vibrate, periodically during an emergency call.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Sound
➔
Emergency tone
.
2. Select
Off
,
Alert
, or
Vibrate
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 168
Display
Wallpaper
Customize the background of the Home and Lock screens.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
Wallpaper
.
2. Select a screen, from
Home screen
,
Lock screen
, or
Home and lock screens
.
3. Select a source for wallpaper, from
Gallery
,
Live
wallpaper
, or
Wallpapers
.
4. Follow the prompts to set the picture or wallpaper.
Note:
You can also set Wallpaper by touching and holding on
the Home screen.
LED Indicator
The LED indicator on the front of the device displays when
the device is locked, to notify you of status changes and
events. Use LED indicator settings to configure how the LED
functions.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
LED Indicator
.
2. Select options:
•Charging
: When turned On, the LED glows red during
charging, and green when the battery is fully charged.
•Low battery
: When turned On, the LED blinks red to indicate
low battery charge.
• Missed event
: When turned on, the LED blinks orange to show
that you have missed calls, new messages, or application
events.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
169
Multi window
When enabled, Multi Window allows you to use multiple apps
on the same screen, in multiple, resizable windows.
For more information about Multi window, see “Multi
Window” on page 31.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Multi window
to enable or disable the feature.
Tip:
You can also enable or disable Multi window from
Notifications. Sweep your finger down from the top of the
screen to display Notifications, then touch Multi window.
Page buddy
Enable Page buddy to have selected Page buddies
automatically appear on the Home screen when you use S
Pen, or optional accessories such as earphones or a dock, or
while you are roaming. Page buddies give you information
about using the connected accessory, and offer apps at the
bottom of the screen you might like to use with the
accessory. An icon will appear in the Home screen page
indicator, to let you know a Page buddy is active.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Page buddy
to turn the feature On or Off.
3. Touch
Page buddy
, then select page buddies.
Tip:
For more information about page buddies, touch
Page
buddy help
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 170
Screen mode
Choose a screen mode to match your type of viewing.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch Screen mode, then select a mode.
Brightness
Set the default screen brightness.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
Brightness
.
2. Drag the slider to set the brightness, or touch
Automatic brightness
to allow the device to adjust
brightness in response to light conditions.
3. Touch to save the setting.
Auto-rotate screen
When enabled, the screen’s orientation automatically
changes when you rotate the device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Auto-rotate screen
to turn the feature On or Off.
Tip:
You can also control Auto-rotate from Notifications with
the Screen rotation setting.
Screen timeout
Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen
touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
Screen timeout
.
2. Touch a setting to select it.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
171
Smart rotation
When enabled, your device automatically adjusts or disables
automatic screen rotation to allow for the position of your
face and the device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Smart rotation
to enable or disable the setting.
Smart stay
When enabled, your device automatically disables the screen
timeout to keep the screen on as long as you are looking at
it.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Smart stay
to enable or disable the setting.
Font style
Set the font for screen displays.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
Font style
.
2. Select a font, or touch
Get fonts online
to browse and
download a new font.
Font size
Set the font size for screen displays.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
Font size
.
2. Select a font size.
Touch key light duration
Set the length of time the Menu and Back Keys remain lit
after you touch them.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
➔
Touch key light duration
.
2. Choose a time period, or
Always off
or
Always on
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 172
Display battery percentage
When On, the battery’s charge level displays in the Status bar
next to the Battery icon.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Display battery percentage
to turn the setting On
or Off.
Auto adjust screen tone
When turned On, your device automatically analyzes the
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Display
.
2. Touch
Auto adjust screen tone
to turn the feature On or
Off.
Storage
Manage the use of memory resources in your device’s
Device memory, and on an installed memory card.
Device memory
View usage for your device’s internal memory.
Note:
This setting cannot be configured.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Under
Device memory
, view memory usage for various
categories. Touch a category for more information.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
173
SD card
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Storage
.
2. Under
SD card
, view memory usage for various
categories. Touch a category for more information.
3. Touch
Unmount SD card
to prepare the memory card for
safe removal or formatting. For more information, see
“Removing a Memory Card” on page 15.
4. Touch
Format SD card
to permanently remove all
content from an installed memory card.
Power saving mode
Configure Power saving mode settings to conserve battery
power.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Power saving mode
.
2. Touch
Power saving mode
to turn the setting
On or Off. The setting must be On to configure options.
3. Touch
Power saving mode
to configure options:
• CPU power saving
: When enabled, the device’s maximum
performance is limited. This does not affect normal usage,
such as browsing and video playback.
• Screen power saving
: When enabled, the screen uses
reduced frame refresh rate and lower brightness.
• Background color
: When enabled, the background uses lower
brightness in Email and Internet.
• Turn off Haptic feedback
: When enabled, Haptic feedback is
turned off, and no vibration plays when you touch the screen.
• Learn about power saving
: View details about Power saving
options.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 174
Battery
See what’s using battery power.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Battery
.
2. View battery usage for applications and services
currently running. Touch an item for more information,
or to configure options for managing power use.
Application manager
You can download and install applications from the Google
Play™ Store or S Suggest, or create applications using the
Android SDK and install them on your device. Use Application
manager to manage applications on your device.
Warning!
Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Application manager
.
2. Touch
Downloaded
,
Running
, or
All
to view the status of
applications and services. Touch an app or service for
more information, and for app options, such as
stopping or uninstalling.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
175
Personal
Location services
Location services control your device's use of GPS signals.
Some apps may require one or more location services be
turned On for full app functionality.
GPS signals may be affected by your surroundings, including:
•
Buildings
•
Tunnels or underground structures
•
Weather conditions
•
High-voltage or electromagnetic fields
•
Tinted windows
Important!
Verizon Wireless values your privacy. Because of
this, your device is defaulted to only acquire your
location when you dial 911. To use Location-Based
Services, you must first enable location services on
your device.
E911
E911 location service is standard on all mobile phones, to
allow sharing of your GPS location with emergency personnel
when you make a call to emergency services (such as 911).
This setting is not configurable.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Location services
➔
E911
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 176
VZW location services
Enable or disable location service from Verizon Wireless.
Note:
VZW location services must be enabled to use some
applications.
Important!
By selecting VZW location services, you are
enabling Verizon Wireless and third-party
authenticated and validated location services to
access certain location information available
through this device and/or the network.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Location services
.
2. Touch
VZW location services
to enable or disable
Verizon Wireless location services.
Standalone GPS services
Enable or disable location service from GPS satellites.
Note:
Standalone location services must be enabled to use
some applications. You can also enable or disable
Standalone GPS services with the GPS setting on
Notifications. For more information, refer to
“Notifications” on page 33.
Important!
By selecting Standalone GPS services, you are
allowing access to all location information by any
third party through web access or any software or
peripheral components you choose to install,
download, add, or attach to the device or any other
means. Enabling this functionality could pose
certain risks to users of this device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Location services
.
2. Touch
Standalone GPS services
to enable or disable
Standalone GPS services.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
177
Google location services
Enable or disable location services from Google location
services.
Note:
Google location services must be enabled to use some
applications.
Important!
By selecting Google location services, you are
allowing Google’s location service to collect
anonymous location data. Some data may be
stored on your device. Collection may occur even
when no apps are running.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Location services
.
2. Touch
Google location services
to enable or disable
Google location services.
Lock screen
Choose settings for unlocking your device.
For more information about using the lock and unlock
features, see “Securing Your Device” on page 16.
Screen lock
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Screen lock
for settings:
•Swipe
: When enabled, you unlock the device by swiping your
finger across the screen. This is the default screen lock, and
offers no security, but you can set special lock screen options;
see
“Lock screen”
on page 177.
•Motion
: When enabled, you unlock the device by touching and
holding on the screen and tilting the device forward. Touch the
option for more information and a demonstration of the motion.
This screen lock offers no security, but you can set special lock
screen options; see
“Lock screen”
on page 177.
• Face unlock
: When enabled, you unlock the device by looking
at the screen. This option offers low security, because someone
who looks similar to you could unlock your device. Touch the
option for more information, and to set up Face unlock.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 178
• Face and voice
: When enabled, you unlock the device by
looking at the screen and speaking. This option offers low
security, because someone who looks and/or sounds similar to
you could unlock your device. Touch the option for more
information, and to set up Face and voice unlock.
• Pattern
: When enabled, you draw a pattern, which you create,
on the screen to unlock the device. Touch the option, then
follow the prompts to create or change your screen unlock
pattern.
•PIN
: When enabled, you enter a numeric PIN (Personal
Identification Number), which you create, to unlock the device.
with PIN screen lock, you can also set the With swipe lock and
Lock screen options.
•Password
: When enabled, you enter an alphanumeric
password, which you create, to unlock the device.
•None
: Disable all custom screen lock settings, to use the
default swipe unlock screen.
With swipe lock
When you have Face, Face and voice, Pattern, PIN, or
Password screen locks enabled, you may choose to have
your device prompt you to swipe the screen before
attempting to unlock the screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
With swipe lock
to enable or disable the option.
Note:
The With swipe lock setting is only available if you have
set one of the screen locks listed above.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
179
Lock screen options
When the Screen lock is set to Swipe or Motion, or you have
the With swipe lock option enabled, you can set special
options for the lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
➔
Lock screen options
.
2. Configure these options:
•Shortcuts
: Touch to control display of app shortcuts
at the bottom of the lock screen. Touch
Shortcuts
to choose
shortcuts to display: touch and drag a shortcut to a new
position, or to the trash can to remove it, and touch
+
to select
a new shortcut.
• Information ticker
: Set news, stock, or Facebook to display on
a ticker on the lock screen.
•Clock
: When enabled, the lock screen displays a digital clock.
•Dual clock
: Touch to control display of a dual clock
to show the time in two zones when you’re traveling. Touch
Dual clock
to set a home city. When you have location services
turned on while traveling, the dual clock will display the time in
your home city and current location.
• Weather
: Touch to control display of the current location’s
weather on the lock screen.
• Ripple effect
: When enabled, a ripple effect shows on the lock
screen when you touch the screen. If you choose a live
wallpaper for the lock screen, ripple effect is disabled.
• Ink effect
: When enabled, an ink effect shows on the lock
screen when you touch the screen. If you choose a live
wallpaper for the lock screen, the ripple effect is disabled.
•Help text
: Touch the check box to control display of tips as you
use the lock screen.
• Camera quick access
: Touch to control access to
the camera from the lock screen using a motion gesture. When
enabled, touch and hold on the lock screen, then rotate the
device to landscape orientation to launch the Camera. Touch
Camera quick access
to learn more.
• Wake up in lock screen
: Touch the check box to enable or
disable unlocking by spoken wake-up command.
• Set wake-up command
: Configure wake-up commands, to
be used when the Wake up in lock screen option is enabled.
You can configure commands to wake up the device, or other
popular features.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 180
Popup Note on lock screen
When enabled, a Popup Note appears on the lock screen
(when screen lock options other than Swipe or Motion are
active).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Popup Note on lock screen
to enable or disable
the setting.
Improve facial recognition
When you have Face screen lock set, you can use the
Improve facial recognition setting to improve your device’s
recognition of your face.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Improve facial recognition
to enable or disable
the setting.
Note:
The Improve facial recognition setting is only available if
you have set a Face screen lock.
Presence check
When you have Face screen lock set, you can choose to have
the device prompt you to blink to start facial recognition, to
improve security.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Presence check
to enable or disable the setting.
Note:
The Presence check setting is only available if you have
set a Face screen lock.
Make pattern visible
When you have a Pattern screen lock set, you can choose
whether the pattern is visible briefly as you draw it on the
lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Make pattern visible
to enable or disable the
setting.
Note:
The Make pattern visible setting is only available if you
have set a pattern screen lock.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
181
Lock automatically
When you have a screen lock set, you can choose a a time
period for automatically locking the screen after the screen
turns off, or choose to have the screen lock immediately
when the screen turns off.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Lock automatically
, then select an option.
Note:
The Lock automatically setting is only available if you
have set a screen lock.
Lock instantly with power key
When enabled, pressing the
Power/Lock Key
locks
the screen instantly.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Lock instantly with power key
to enable or
disable the option.
Vibrate on screen tap
When enabled, the device vibrates when you touch the lock
screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
.
2. Touch
Vibrate on screen tap
to enable or disable the
option.
Owner information
Enter text to display on the Lock screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Lock screen
➔
Owner information
.
2. Touch
Show owner info on lock screen
to enable display
of Owner information on the Lock screen.
3. Enter Owner information text. For more information
about entering text, see see “Entering Text” on
page 40.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 182
Security
Encryption
As a security measure, you can encrypt the contents of your
device or an optional installed memory card (not included),
and require a password each time you turn on the device or
access the memory card.
Encryption may take an hour or more to complete. Start with
a charged battery, and attach the charger until encryption is
complete. Loss of power or other interruption may cause the
loss of some or all data.
Encrypt device
As a security measure, you can encrypt the contents of your
device and require a password to access the contents each
time you turn it on.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Encrypt device
to start encryption. Follow the
prompts to complete encryption.
Encrypt external SD card
As a security measure, you can encrypt the contents of an
optional installed SD card (not included), and require a
password each time you access the card.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Encrypt external SD card
card to start encryption.
Follow the prompts to complete encryption.
SIM card lock
Set up SIM card lock
As a security measure, you can choose to lock the SIM card,
and require a PIN to use the device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Set up SIM card lock
for these settings:
•Lock SIM card
: Enable to require a PIN be entered to use the
device, then set the PIN.
• Change SIM PIN
: Create a PIN for accessing the SIM card.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
183
Passwords
Make passwords visible
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you
enter them.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Make passwords visible
to enable or disable brief
displays of password characters.
Device administration
View or disable device administrators. Some applications,
such as Corporate email, may require you allow access to
your device by device administrators in certain
circumstances, such as if your device is lost or stolen.
Some features a device administrator might control include:
•
Setting the number of failed password attempts before the device
is restored to factory settings
•
Automatically locking the device.
•
Restoring factory settings on the device.
Device administrators
View, add or remove device administrators.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Select device administrators
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 184
Unknown sources
When enabled, you can install applications from sources
other than Google Play®.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Unknown sources
to enable or disable the option.
Warning!
Because this device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or
any other company, end-users operate these devices
at their own risk.
Credential storage
Trusted credentials
You can install credentials from an installed memory card,
and use the Credential storage settings to allow applications
to access the secure certificates and other credentials.
Trusted credentials
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Trusted credentials
to view certificates you’ve
installed.
Install from device storage
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.
Note:
You must have installed a memory card containing
encrypted certificates to use this feature.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Install from device storage
, then choose a
certificate and follow the prompts to install.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
185
Clear credentials
Clear stored credentials and reset the password.
Note:
This setting is only available if you have installed
certificates.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Security
.
2. Touch
Clear credentials
, then follow the prompts to
clear stored credentials and reset the password.
One-handed operation
Configure options to make using your device easier with one
hand. When an option is enabled, you can adjust the position
of the feature left or right by touching arrows on the screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
One-handed operation
.
2. Configure options:
• Keypad & in-call buttons
: When enabled, you can adjust the
position of the dialing keypad and in-call buttons.
• Samsung keyboard
: When enabled, you can adjust the
position of the Samsung keyboard.
•Calculator
: When enabled, you can adjust the Calculator’s
position.
• Unlock pattern
: When enabled, you adjust the position of the
unlock pattern on the lock screen.
Tip:
Touch
Learn about one-handed operation
for help with
using this feature.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 186
Language and input
Language
Set the language used by your device’s screens.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Language
.
2. Select a language from the list.
Personal dictionary
Create and manage a list of words for use in text entry, for
matching your key touches with words.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Personal
dictionary
.
Keyboards and input methods
Configure text entry options to your preferences.
Default
Choose the default method for entering text. From the
factory, the default method is Samsung keyboard. If you
install other text entry apps, you can set them as default
here.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Default
.
2. Touch an input method.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
187
Google voice typing
Configure Google voice input settings. When you enable
Google voice in Settings, it is available for text entry when
you touch a text field to enter text.
For more information, see “Using Google Voice Typing” on
page 42.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2. Touch
Google voice typing
to enable it.
3. Touch beside Google voice typing to configure
options:
• Choose input languages
: Select languages for Google voice
typing. Select
Automatic
to use the Default language
exclusively, or choose other language(s).
• Block offensive words
: When enabled, words many people
find offensive are not shown in results of Google voice
searches. Offensive words are replaced in results with a
placeholder (####).
• Download offline speech recognition
: Install additional
speech recognition.
Samsung keyboard
Configure Samsung keypad settings. When you enable
Samsung keyboard in Settings, it is available for text entry
when you touch a text field to enter text.
For more information, see “Using Samsung Keyboard” on
page 41.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2.
Samsung keyboard
is enabled by default. Touch to
configure options:
• Portrait keyboard types
: Choose the default keypad when the
screen is in portrait mode, from Qwerty or 3x4 keyboard
(similar to a phone keypad).
• Input language
: Select languages for the Samsung keyboard.
Tip:
When you have more than one language selected, you can
slide your finger on the space bar while entering text to
switch languages.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 188
• Predictive text
: Touch to enable predictive text, to
have
predictive text
suggest words matching your text entries
and optionally, complete common words automatically. Touch
Predictive text
to configure options:
–
Personalized data
: When enabled, predictive text uses
personal language data you have entered to make better
predictions. Samsung keyboard can collect all the text you enter,
including personal data and credit card numbers, in order to
give better prediction results.
–
Learn from Facebook
: Log into Facebook to allow your device
to learn from your Facebook postings.
–
Learn from Gmail
: Log into Gmail to allow your device to learn
from your Gmail email.
–
Learn from Twitter
: Log into Twitter to allow your device to
learn from your Twitter postings.
–
Clear remote data
: Delete your information stored on the
personalization server.
–
Clear personalized data
: Remove all personalized data you
have entered.
–
Privacy
: Read the privacy policy.
• Swiftkey flow
: When enabled, you can enter text by sliding
your finger across the keyboard.
•Pen detection
: When enabled, a handwriting pad is
automatically displayed when your device detects the S Pen.
• One-handed operation
: When enabled, Samsung keyboard
features can be adjusted right or left for easier use with one
hand.
• Handwriting
:
–
Input languages
: Choose languages to use with handwriting
and Samsung keyboard.
–
Recognition type
: Choose the type of handwriting recognition,
from strokes, or complete letters.
–
Recognition time
: Choose the length of time the keyboard
waits to evaluate handwriting gestures.
–
Pen thickness
: Choose the size of handwriting strokes on the
screen.
–
Pen color
: Choose the color of handwriting strokes on screen.
–
Gesture guide
: Learn about gestures you can use while
handwriting text.
–
Tutorial
: Learn about using handwriting.
–
About
: View information about Samsung keyboard handwriting.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
189
• Advanced
:
–
Auto-capitalization
: When enabled, predictive text
automatically capitalizes words in your text based on common
usage, such as at the beginning of sentences.
–
Auto-punctuate
: When enabled, a period and space are
automatically entered to end a sentence, when you tap the
space bar twice.
–
Character preview
: When enabled, characters available on
the key you touch display briefly as you enter text.
–
Key-tap vibration
: When enabled, a vibration plays for your
key touches.
–
Key-tap sound
: When enabled, a sound plays for your key
touches.
•Tutorial
: Learn about using Samsung keyboard.
• Reset settings
: Return Samsung keyboard settings to the
defaults.
Swype
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
.
2.
Swype
is enabled by default. Touch to configure:
•How to Swype
: Learn about using Swype.
• Preferences
: Set Swype options:
–
Vibrate on keypress
: When enabled, the devices vibrates for
your Swype touches.
–
Sound on keypress
: When enabled, the device plays sounds
for your Swype touches.
–
Show helpful tips
: When enabled, Swype displays helpful
information as you Swype.
–
Auto-spacing
: When enabled, Swype automatically inserts
spaces between words as you complete them.
–
Auto-capitalization
: When enabled, Swype automatically
capitalizes the first word of sentences.
–
Show complete trace
: When enabled, Swype displays the
trace of each word until you start the next word.
–
Pop-up on keypress
: When enabled, characters display
above keys as you enter text.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 190
–
Next word prediction
: When enabled, Swype predicts the
next word based on the previous word.
–
Reset Swype’s dictionary
: Delete all the words you’ve added
to the Swype dictionary.
–
Version
: View information about Swype.
• Language options
: Choose the current language for Swype,
and download new languages.
• Swype Connect
: Enable personalization from your accounts,
and choose whether to contribute your usage data to improve
predictions.
• Personal dictionary
: View and manage words in your Swype
dictionary, used for word completion,. suggestion, and spell-
checking.
•Updates
: Check for updates to Swype, and install them if
desired.
Speech
Voice search
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Voice search
.
2. Set options:
• Language
: Choose a language for voice searching.
• Speech output
: Choose options for speech output.
• Block offensive words
: When enabled, words many people
find offensive are not shown in results of Google voice
searches. Offensive words are replaced in results with a
placeholder (####).
• Hotword detection
: When enabled, you can say “Google” to
launch voice search.
• Download offline speech recognition
: Download speech
recognition, to enable voice input while offline.
• Personalized recognition
: Enable to have your device improve
recognition based on your speech.
• Google account dashboard:
View and manage your collected
data.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
191
Text-to-speech output
Text-to-speech (TTS) provides audible readout of text, for
example, the contents of text messages, and the Caller ID for
incoming calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Text-to-speech
output
.
2. Touch a setting to configure:
• Preferred TTS engine
–
Select
Google Text-to-speech Engine
, or
Samsung TTS
.
• General
–
Speech rate
: Choose a rate at which text readouts are spoken.
–
Listen to an example
: Play a sample of speech synthesis.
–
Driving mode
: When enabled, incoming calls and new
notifications are read out automatically. Touch
to
e
nable. Touch
Driving mode
to choose items for readout when
Driving mode is enabled.
Mouse/trackpad
Customize the response of your screen swipes.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Pointer speed
.
2. Touch and drag along the scale to set the pointer
speed.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 192
Back up and reset
Set options for backing up your information and resetting
your device.
Back up my data
When enabled, app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other device
settings are backed up to Google servers.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Back up and reset
.
2. Touch
Back up my data
to enable or disable back-up.
Backup account
Sign in to a Google account to use for backing up settings.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Back up and reset
.
2. Touch
Backup account
, then follow the prompts to sign
in to a Google account.
Automatic restore
Use Automatic restore to have previous app settings and
data automatically update from the backup when you
reinstall the app.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Back up and reset
.
2. Touch
Automatic restore
to enable or disable the
setting.
Factory data reset
Use Factory data reset to return all settings to the defaults,
and remove all data from the device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Back up and reset
.
2. Touch
Factory data reset
, then follow the prompts.
Important!
Settings and data erased in a Factory data reset
cannot be recovered. To save your settings, you
can use Back up my data settings before a reset.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
193
Accounts
Google
Configure options for Google account and privacy settings.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Google
.
2. Configure options:
•Accounts
: View Google accounts set up on your device, and
configure syncing.
•Privacy
: Choose Google features, to configure privacy and
account settings.
Backup Assistant Plus
Backup AssistantSM Plus is a free service that protects your
contacts by saving to a secure web site. If your phone is lost,
stolen or damaged, or if you change phones, Backup
Assistant can restore your saved contacts to a new phone,
wirelessly. Schedule backups to save your information
manually or automatically. Log in to your web account for full
access to your contacts for viewing, printing, adding,
deleting and editing.
Visit
http://verizonwireless.com/baplus
, or contact Verizon
Wireless for more information.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accounts and sync
➔
Backup Assistant
.
Tip:
You can also launch Backup Assistant from
Contacts
.
From Contacts, touch
Menu
➔
Backup
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 194
Add account
Set up an account, to synchronize the account with your
device. When an account is set up on your device, you don’t
have to log in each time you access the account from the
device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Add account
.
2. Select an account, then follow the prompts to enter
your credentials and set up the account on your device.
System
Motion
Your device recognizes motion, to allow you to navigate and
access features by moving the device in specific gestures.
Configure specific motion gestures and settings, to
customize your device to your preferences.
For more information about using gestures, see “Hand
Gestures” on page 30.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Motion
.
2. Touch
Motion
to turn Motion On or Off.
3. Touch
Motion
to configure settings:
• Quick glance
: Check key information at a glance while the
screen is off, by reaching toward your device.
• Direct call
: When enabled, you can lift the device to your ear
while viewing a contact to dial the contact’s device number.
•Smart alert
: When enabled, the device will automatically notify
you to missed calls and alerts that occurred while the device
was stationary.
• Double tap to top
: When enabled, a double tap on the top of
the device takes you to the top of the list.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
195
• Tilt to zoom
: When enabled, tilting the device while in Gallery
or Internet causes the screen to zoom in or out.
• Pan to move icon
: When enabled, moving the device in a
panning motion (side-to-side) moves a highlighted icon to a
new location on the Home screen.
• Pan to browse images
: When enabled, moving the device in a
panning motion while viewing an image moves focus around in
the image.
• Shake to update
: When enabled, shaking the device starts a
new scan for available devices.
• Turn over to mute/pause
: When enabled, turning the device
screen-down automatically mutes incoming call ringtones and
alerts sounds.
• Advanced settings
:
–
Quick glance
: Choose key information, to display when you
have the Quick glance motion enabled. Quick glance must be
enabled to configure this advanced setting.
–
Gyroscope calibration
: Tune the motion detection using your
device’s internal gyroscope.
–
Tilt to zoom
: Choose the speed at which you tilt to zoom, when
you have the Tilt to zoom motion enabled. Tilt to zoom must be
enabled to configure this advanced setting.
–
Pan to move icon
: Choose the sensitivity of the device to
panning motions, when you have the Pan to move icon motion
enabled. Pan to move icon must be enabled to configure this
advanced setting.
–
Pan to browse images
: Choose the sensitivity of the device to
panning motions, when you have the Pan to browse images
motion enabled. Pan to browse images must be enabled to
configure this advanced setting.
• Learn about hand motions
: Get help with understanding
motion gestures.
• Palm swipe to capture
: When enabled, swiping the side of
your hand across the screen side-to-side saves a screen shot
of the current screen.
• Palm touch to mute
: When enabled, covering the screen with
your hand mutes or pauses media playback.
• Learn about hand motions
: Get help with understanding the
palm swipe and palm touch gestures.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 196
S Pen
Dominant hand
Choose the hand you write with most often, to maximize S
Pen performance.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
➔
Dominant hand
.
2. Choose
Left handed
or
Right handed
.
Pen attach/detach sound
Choose a sound to play when you attach or detach S Pen
from your device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Choose a sound, or choose Off for no sound.
Open Popup Note
When enabled, Popup Note launches automatically when you
detach S Pen from your device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Touch
Open Popup Note
to enable or disable the setting.
Battery saving
By default, your device detects when S Pen is detached, and
displays the S Pen icon in the Status bar. To save battery
power, you can disable this setting.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Touch
Battery saving
to enable or disable the setting.
S Pen keeper
When enabled, your device plays a sound and displays an
alert if you walk with the device while S Pen is detached.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Touch
S Pen keeper
to enable or disable the setting.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
197
Air view
When turned On, hovering S Pen near an item on the screen
displays information about the item.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Touch
Air view
to turn the option On or Off.
3. When Air view is on, touch
Air view
for options:
•Pointer
: When enabled, a pointer displays on the screen to
show S Pen position.
• Information preview
: When enabled, hovering over an item
displays a preview, full text, or a zoomed-in image.
• Icon labels (by pen nib)
: When enabled, hovering over icons
on the screen displays their labels.
• List scrolling
: When enabled, holding S Pen over the edge of
the screen scrolls through a list.
Sound and haptic feedback
When enabled, sound and vibration plays for S Pen actions.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Touch
Sound and haptic feedback
to enable or disable
the setting.
Quick Command settings
Use S Pen gestures to open applications or perform tasks.
Use preloaded gestures, or create your own combination of
symbols, characters, or words.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
.
2. Touch
Quick Command settings
to configure options:
• Add a command
: Select an application or function to launch,
then configure a gesture by writing your own combination of
symbols, characters, or words with S Pen.
• Internet search
: Write a question mark (?) with S Pen to
launch Internet.
•Email
: Write the “at” symbol (@) with S Pen to launch Email.
•Maps
: Write an exclamation mark (!) with S Pen to launch
Maps.
•Call
: Write a pound sign (#) with S Pen to launch Phone.
• Messaging
: Write a tilde sign (~) with S Pen to launch
Messaging.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 198
S Pen help
Learn about S Pen.
From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
S Pen
➔
S Pen help
.
Accessory
Configure your device’s behavior when it is connected to an
optional dock (not included).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessory
.
2. Configure settings:
• Dock sound
: When enabled, a sound plays when you insert
and remove the device from the dock.
• Audio output mode
: When enabled, audio plays through the
dock speakers when the device is docked.
• Desk home screen display
: When enabled, displays a special
screen when the device is docked.
• Audio output:
Choose a destination for audio output when you
connect to devices via HDMI cable.
Date and time
By default, your device receives date and time information
from the wireless network. When you are outside network
coverage, you may want to set date and time information
manually using the Date & time settings.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Date and time
.
2. Touch a setting to configure:
• Automatic date and time
: When enabled, the device takes
date and time updates from the wireless network.
•Set date
: Enter the current date (only available when Automatic
date and time is disabled).
•Set time
: Enter the current time (only available when the
Automatic setting is disabled).
• Automatic time zone
: When enabled, the device takes the
time zone from the wireless network.
• Select time zone
: Choose your local time zone (only available
when the Automatic setting is disabled).
• Use 24-hour format
: Set the format for time displays.
• Select date format
: Set the format for date displays.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
199
Accessibility
Your device offers features to make using the device easier
for those with certain physical disabilities. Use the
Accessibility settings to activate these services.
System
Auto-rotate screen
When enabled, the screen’s orientation automatically
changes when you rotate the device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Auto-rotate screen
to turn the feature On or Off.
Tip:
You can also set Auto rotate from Notifications with the
Screen rotation setting.
Screen timeout
Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen
touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
➔
Screen timeout
.
2. Touch a setting to select it.
Lock automatically
When you have a screen lock set, you can choose a a time
period for automatically locking the screen after the screen
turns off, or choose to have the screen lock immediately
when the screen turns off.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
➔
Lock automatically
.
2. Touch a setting to select it.
Note:
The Lock automatically setting is only available if you
have set a screen lock.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 200
Speak passwords
When enabled, you can speak passwords for log-ins.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Speak passwords
to turn the feature On or Off.
Answering/ending calls
You can set options for answering and ending calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
➔
Answering/ending calls
.
2. Touch an option to enable or disable it:
• Answering key
: When enabled, pressing the
Home Key
answers incoming calls.
• The power key ends calls
: When enabled, you can end voice
calls by pressing the
Power/Lock Key
. When
this option is enabled, pressing the Power/Lock Key during a
call does not lock the screen.
Accessibility shortcut
When enabled, a link to Accessibility settings displays on the
Device options menu, when you press and hold the
Power/Lock Key
. This provides quick access to
accessibility settings, to make changes as you use the
device.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Accessibility shortcut
to enable or disable the
setting.
Services
TalkBack
Enable or disable accessibility services.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
TalkBack
to enable or disable readout of menu
options, application titles, contacts, and other items
when scrolling and making selections.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
201
Vision
Font size
Set the font size for screen displays.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
➔
Font size
.
2. Select a size.
Negative colors
When enabled, Negative colors reverses the colors on the
screen.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Negative colors
to enable or disable reversal of
screen colors.
Text-to-speech output
Text-to-speech (TTS) provides audible readout of text, for
example, the contents of text messages, and the Caller ID for
incoming calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Language and input
➔
Text-to-speech
output
.
2. Touch a setting to configure:
• Preferred TTS engine
–
Select
Google Text-to-speech Engine
, or
Samsung TTS
.
• General
–
Speech rate
: Choose a rate at which text readouts are spoken.
–
Listen to an example
: Play a sample of speech synthesis.
–
Driving mode
: When enabled, incoming calls and new
notifications are read out automatically. Touch
to
e
nable, then touch
Driving mode
to choose items for readout
when Driving mode is enabled.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 202
Enhance web accessibility
When enabled, this service allows apps to install scripts from
Google that make their Web content more accessible.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Install Web scripts
, then follow the prompts to
enable or disable the service.
Hearing
Sound balance
Set the balance of audio output to the left and right ear, when
using an optional headset or headphones (not included).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
➔
Sound balance
2. Drag the slider to set the balance.
Mono audio
When enabled, sound is delivered as mono, to support
listening with one earphone.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Mono audio
to enable or disable the service.
Turn off all sounds
When enabled, all sounds are disabled, including the voice
portion of calls.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
.
2. Touch
Turn off all sounds
to enable or disable the
service.
Mobility
Tap and hold delay
Set the length of time the device considers a screen touch
before interpreting a touch as touch-and-hold.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Accessibility
➔
Tap and hold delay
.
2. Touch a setting to select it.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
203
Developer options
Set options for use when developing apps for devices.
Important!
These settings are intended for development use
only. They can cause errors to occur on your device
and with the applications on it.
Turning Developer options On or Off
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Touch
Developer options
to turn the setting On
or Off.
Desktop backup password
Set a password for protecting full desktop backups.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Touch
Desktop backup password
, then enter the current
and new passwords. Touch
Set backup password
to
save your settings.
Stay awake
When enabled, the screen will never sleep while charging.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Touch
Stay awake
to enable or disable the setting.
Protect SD card
When enabled, apps must request permission to read an
installed optional SD card (not included).
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Touch
Protect SD card
to enable or disable the setting.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 204
Debugging
Enable or disable debugging options.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Configure options:
• USB debugging
: When enabled, connecting your device to a
computer with a USB data cable launches debugging mode.
• Allow mock locations
: When enabled, mock locations are
allowed during debugging.
• Select app to be debugged
: Choose an app to be debugged
when device is in debugging mode.
• Wait for debugger
: When enabled, a device to be debugged
waits for the debugger to be attached.
Input
Configure options for input.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Configure options:
• Show touches
: When enabled, screen touches cause the
screen to display visual feedback.
• Show pointer location
: When enabled, the current pointer
location shows on a screen overlay.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
205
Drawing
Configure options for drawing screens.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Configure options:
• Show layout boundaries
: When enabled, clip boundaries,
margins, and other layout details display.
• Show GPU view updates
: When enabled, views are flashed
inside windows when they are drawn with the GPU.
• Show screen updates
: When enabled, areas of the screen
flash as they update.
• Window animation scale
: Choose a scale for window
animations.
• Transition animation scale
: Choose a scale for screen
transitions.
• Animator duration scale
: Choose a scale for animators.
• Disable hardware overlays
: When enabled, the GPU is always
used for screen compositing.
• Force GPU rendering
: When enabled, 2D hardware
acceleration is used in applications.
Monitoring
Configure options for monitoring apps.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Configure options:
•Strict mode
: When enabled, the screen flashes while apps
perform long operations.
• Show CPU usage
: When enabled CPU usage displays on a
screen overlay.
• GPU rendering profile
: When enabled, rendering time is
measured in adb shell dumpsys gfxinfo.
• Enable traces
: Choose traces.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Settings 206
Apps
Configure app options.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
Developer options
.
2. Configure options:
• Do not keep activities
: When enabled, activities are destroyed
as soon as the user leaves them.
• Limit background processes
: Choose options for processes
running in the background.
• Show all ANRs
: When enabled, an App Not Responding dialog
displays for apps running in the background.
About phone
View information about your device, including status, legal
information, hardware and software versions, and a tutorial.
1. From the Home screen, touch
Apps
➔
Settings
➔
About phone
.
2. Touch items to view details:
• Software update
: Check availability and install updates.
•Status
: View information about your device’s current status.
• Legal information
: Display open source licenses, configure
license settings, including your DivX
®
VOD registration, and
Google info.
• Model number
: View your device’s model number.
• Android version
: View the firmware version of your device.
• Baseband version
: View the baseband version of your device.
•Kernel version
: View the kernel version of your device.
• Build number
: View the build number of your device.
• Hardware version
: View the hardware version of your device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
207
Section 9: Health and Safety Information
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi
™
mode in the
2.4 and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices
operating within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors,
not outside, in order to avoid interference with Mobile
Satellite Services (MSS). Therefore, this device is restricted
from being used outdoors when operating in frequencies
between 5.15-5.25 GHz.
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”
are used in this section to refer to your phone.
Read this
information before using your mobile device
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication
includes the following information:
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health
problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some
researchers have reported biological changes associated
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.
The majority of studies published have failed to show an
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell
phone and health problems.
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health
effects.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 208
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not
be confused with the effects from other types of
electromagnetic energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the
genetic material.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic
radiation with relatively low frequencies.
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection
between RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies
that have shown a connection have failed.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community
has supported additional research to address gaps in
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
209
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions
being drawn from this data. Additional information about
Interphone can be found at
http://www.iarc.fr/en/media-centre/pr/2010/pdfs/pr200_E.pdf.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA
continues to monitor developments in this field.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users
(COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the
COSMOS study can be found at
http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html
.
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence
(MOBI-KIDS)
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy
from communication technologies including cell phones and
brain cancer in young people. This is an international
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be
found at
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/
view.php?ID=39.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)
Program of the National Cancer Institute
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about
SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 210
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry
to take a number of steps, including the following:
•
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
•
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to
the user; and
•
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect
the public.
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
your head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets
and various types of body-worn accessories such as
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance
requirements when used against the head and against the
body.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
211
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head
from RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that
accessories which claim to shield the head from those
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory
attached to the phone.
Studies have shown that these products generally do not
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,
leading to an increase in RF absorption.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure
apply to children and teenagers as well.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between
the head and the cell phone.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from
various sources can be obtained from the following
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):
•
FCC RF Safety Program:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 212
•
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
http://www.epa.gov/radtown/wireless-tech.html.
•
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
http://www.osha.gov/SLTC/radiofrequencyradiation/.
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/.
•
World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/en/.
•
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
http://www.icnirp.de.
•
Health Protection Agency:
http://www.hpa.org.uk/Topics/Radiation/.
•
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
HomeBusinessandEntertainment/CellPhones/default.htm.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF
energy.
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
213
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety
to give additional protection to the public and to account for
any variations in measurements.
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC
RF exposure guidelines. This device has a FCC ID number:
A3LSMN900R4 [Model Number: SM-N900R4] and the specific
SAR levels for this device can be found at the following FCC
website:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/
.
The SAR information for this device can also be found on
Samsung’s website:
http://www.samsung.com/sar
.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be
accessed online on the FCC's website through
http://
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html
. To find information that
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the
instructions on the website and it should provide values for
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 214
SAR information can also be obtained at
http://www.fcc.gov/encyclopedia/specific-absorption-rate-sar-
cellular-telephones
.
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS)
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be
available. For more information, please contact your wireless
provider.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
215
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe
operation of his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their
primary responsibility.
Do not engage in any activity while
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes
impaired
. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand
and address distractions.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use
may be permitted in certain areas.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
•
Use a hands-free device;
•
Secure your phone within easy reach;
•
Place calls when you are not moving;
•
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
•
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
•
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;
•
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in
an automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 216
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video
games while operating a vehicle.
For more information, go to
http://www.ctia.org
.
Battery Use and Safety
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or
damage
. Most battery issues arise from improper
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the
continued use of damaged batteries.
•
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise
attempt to change the form of your battery
. Do not put a high
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.
•
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear
to be working properly.
•
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source
. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in
high temperatures.
•
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire
. The phone
or the battery may explode when overheated.
•
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery
. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized
service center.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
217
•
Avoid dropping the cell phone
. Dropping the phone or the
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.
•
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way
.
•
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects
. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the
object causing the short-circuiting.
Important!
Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and
recharge your battery only with
Samsung-approved chargers which are specifically
designed for your phone.
WARNING!
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard
.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or
chargers.
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers
.
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
•
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious
hazard
.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 218
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung
mobile device by working with respected take-back
companies in every state in the country.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these
locations may be found at:
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.jsp
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted
at these locations for no fee.
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional
information regarding specific locations may be found at:
http://www.epa.gov/epawaste/partnerships/plugin/cellphone/
index.htm
or at
http://www.call2recycle.org/
.
Mail It In
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.
Just go to
http://fun.samsungmobileusa.com/recycling/index.jsp
.
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved
recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
219
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile
devices and batteries
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help
us protect the environment - recycle!
Warning!
Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may
explode.
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety
instructions per UL guidelines:
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE
POWER OUTLET.
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your
mobile device:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause
injury to you.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 220
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For
more information, please refer to the “Standard
Limited Warranty”.
GPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance
of location-based technology on your mobile device.
Even with GPS, when you make an emergency call:
•
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of
your ability; and
•
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency
responder instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over
time. In some areas, complete information may not be
available.
Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs.
Emergency Calls
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless
mobile device for essential communications (medical
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
221
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal
strength.
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service
providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, touch .
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).
Emergency numbers vary by location.
4. Press the “Send” key.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you
may first need to deactivate those features before you can
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency
call, remember to give all the necessary information as
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do
so.
Care and Maintenance
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many
years:
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and
could cause a fire or explosion.
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the
mobile device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 222
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /
113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Cleaning solutions
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution.
Shock or vibration
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent
proper operation.
Responsible Listening
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss
.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume
settings for long durations may lead to permanent
noise-induced hearing loss.
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
223
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of
sound, settings, and equipment.
You should follow some common sense recommendations
when using any portable audio device:
•
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into
an audio source.
•
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest
volume at which you can hear adequately.
•
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your
hearing.
•
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to
you can hear what you are listening to.
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less
time is required before you hearing could be affected.
•
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound
normal.
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Email: info@audiology.org
Internet:
http://www.audiology.org/Pages/
default.aspx
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 224
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic
Devices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to
discuss alternatives.
National Institute on Deafness and Other
Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: nidcdinfo@nih.gov
Internet:
http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH
(1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: cdcinfo@cdc.gov
Internet:
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/
default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
225
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential
interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
•
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is
turned ON;
•
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
•
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
•
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;
•
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical
device, consult your health care provider.
For more information see:
http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-
faqs.html#
.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your
mobile device off in health care facilities when any
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.
Vehicles
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that
has been added to your vehicle.
Posted Facilities
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted
notices require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 226
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling
point (service station).
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle engine.
When your Device is Wet
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it
to a service center.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive
hearing devices.
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the
amount of interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or
a label located on the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
227
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to
evaluate it for your personal needs.
M-Ratings
: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not
operate in telecoil mode.
T-Ratings
: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in
telecoil mode.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device
is relatively immune to interference noise.
Under the current industry standard, American National
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two
values equals M5.
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would
indicate excellent performance.
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.
M3 + M2 = 5
T3 + T2 = 5
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 228
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19
standard.
HAC for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with
hearing aids.
It is important to try the different features of this phone
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult
your service provider or phone retailer.
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your
mobile device bill.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out
of the reach of small children.
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can
require you to stop using the mobile device if such
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not
expressly approved in this document could void your
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the
mobile device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
229
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Other Important Safety Information
•
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to
the device.
•
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in
your vehicle are securely mounted.
•
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
•
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static
electricity before inserting the headset.
•
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its
parts, or accessories.
•
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could
result.
•
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on
an aircraft.
•
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or
both.
•
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.
•
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device
immediately.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Health and Safety Information 230
•
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.
•
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
231
Section 10: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
What is covered and for how long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material
and workmanship under normal use and service for the
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following
specified period of time after that date:
What is not covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the
Product.
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception
Phone 1 Year
Batteries 1 Year
Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Warranty Information 232
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for
which it is specified.
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new
Product.
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product
and the seller’s name and address.
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
233
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Warranty Information 234
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited
Warranty.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no
more than half of the total administrative, facility and
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or
performance.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
235
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: “Arbitration
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited
Warranty.
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the
Samsung Customer Care Center
for details.
Important!
Please provide warranty information (proof of
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in
order to provide this service at no charge. If the
warranty has expired on the device, charges may
apply.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Warranty Information 236
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to
change without notice. [111611]
End User License Agreement for
Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which
includes computer software and may include associated
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic
documentation in connection with your use of this device
("Software").
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR
THE SOFTWARE.
1.
GRANT OF LICENSE
. Samsung grants you the following
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other
permanent storage media of one computer and use the
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,
and you may not make the Software available over a network
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source
licenses. The open source license provisions may override
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices
section of the Settings menu of your device.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
237
2.
RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP
. Samsung
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.
3.
LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS
. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting
services with the Software.
4.
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA
. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered
as part of the product support services related to the
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s
unique identification number), device number, model name,
customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information
solely to improve their products or to provide customized
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all
times your information will be treated in accordance with
Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:
http://account.samsung.com/membership/pp
.
5.
SOFTWARE UPDATES
. Samsung may provide to you or
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,
and updates and enhancements to any software previously
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively
“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance
your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide
other terms along with such Update. To use Software
provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the
Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.
After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated
Software version may add new functions and, in some
limited cases, may delete existing functions.
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Warranty Information 238
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be
governed by your contractual relationship with your network
carrier.
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the
default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),
your device downloads some Updates automatically from
time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent
before installing any Update If you choose to disable the
“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the
availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check
Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of
your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for
the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi
Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you
choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates
only through Wi-Fi connection.)
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to
have access to the internet and may be subject to
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi
connection, the Software will access through your mobile
network, which may result in additional charges depending
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability
and performance of your device hardware or data access.
7.
SOFTWARE TRANSFER
. You may not transfer this EULA or
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer
must include all of the Software (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.
8.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS
. You acknowledge that the
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.
You agree to comply with all applicable international and
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.
9.
TERMINATION
. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
239
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all
copies, full or partial, of the Software.
10.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.
11.
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS
. Certain third party
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials
on or available from such applications. You expressly
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Warranty Information 240
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party
content, products, or services available on or through any
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of
any third-party application is governed by such third party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
12.
SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS
. Certain Samsung applications
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services
membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that
your use of such applications and services will be subject to
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.
13.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
241
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
14.
U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS
. The
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"
and "commercial software documentation" with only those
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.
15.
APPLICABLE LAW
. This EULA is governed by the laws of
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is
expressly excluded.
16.
DISPUTE RESOLUTION
.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or
consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Warranty Information 242
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall
be conducted according to the American Arbitration
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also
applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first
consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to
optout@sta.samsung.com, with the subject line: "Arbitration
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
243
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the
device and providing the same information. These are the
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of this license.
17.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY
. This EULA is the
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral
or written communications, proposals and representations
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions
shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
244
Index
A
Acces to My Location 100
Accessibility settings
services 200
Accounts
adding a Google account 44
Google 12
Samsung 12
setting up 44
Action Memo
Creating a New Memo 82
Adobe PDF 115
Airplane mode 152
Alarm
Deleting an Existing Alarm 89
Setting 88
AllShare Play
see Samsung Link 122, 123
AllShareCast Hub 122
Application cache and data
Clearing 114
Applications 40
Bloomberg+ 83
Calculator 84
Camera 87
Email 91
Google Mail 92
Google Maps 99
Internet 98
KNOX 98
Messages 101
Video 128
Voice Recorder 132
YouTube 138
Apps
installing 80
uninstalling 80
B
Battery
charging 11
cover, removing & installing 8
indicator 10
installing 10
removing 10
Battery Use & Safety 216
Bloomberg+ 83
Bluetooth
pairing with a device 144
profiles 155
settings 156
turning on or off 144
C
Calculator
Scientific Functions 84
Calendar
Creating An Event 85
Handwriting Mode 85
Settings 86
Call log
creating/updating contacts 62
managing 62
sending messages 62
Calls
answering 60
call-waiting 60
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
245
ending 61
from Call log 59
from Contacts 58
from Favorites 59
in-call options 61
recent 61
rejecting 60
sending to voicemail 60
settings 63
silencing a ringer 60
three-way 59
using the Keypad 57
Care and Maintenance 221
Children and Cell Phones 211
Chrome
Google 87
Clearing
Application cache and data 114
Commercial Mobile Alerting System
(CMAS) 214
Connecting to Video Devices 150
Connections
Accessing the Internet 98
Contacts
backing up 52
Backup Assistant 52
creating 46
creating from Call log 47
creating from the Keypad 47
exporting and importing 51
groups 53
joining 50
My Profile 49
namecards 51
speed dials 55
starred contacts 53
updating 47
updating from Call log 48, 62
updating from Keypad 47
Creating a Playlist 105
D
Deregister
Web Storage 125
Desk Clock 88
Display / Touch-Screen 219
Display settings
brightness 170
font style and size 171
screen timeout 170
DivX
Locating VOD Number 130
Overview 129
Registering Your DivX Device 130
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
207
Downloading
New application 112
Downloads 91
Dropbox 124
E
Email
account settings 75
combined Inbox 75
composing and sending 76
configuring accounts 74
refreshing your accounts 75
Emergency Calls 220
Entering Text
Google voice typing 42
Samsung keyboard 41
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
246
Evernote 91
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)
Signals 207
F
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 226
FCC Notice and Cautions 228
Flipboard 92
G
Gallery
Picture-In-Picture 129
Gmail 92
composing and sending 77
configuring your account 77
Creating an Additional Account 93
managing your account 77
refreshing your account 77
Google
Gmail 77
location services setting 177
managing an account 45
Retrieving Password 93
setting up an account 44
Settings 93
Signing into Your Account 92
Talk 79
your account 12
Google Books 109
Google Maps
Enabling a location source 100
Opening a map 100
Google Music 111
Google Now 133
Google Settings 93
Google Talk
see Hangouts 97
GPS 220
Group
Joining 95
Group Play 94
Creating a Group 95
Joining a Group 95
Share Music 96, 103
Sharing Pictures 95
Spanning Screens 96
Groups
adding contacts 54
creating 53
sending a message 55
Guided Tours 13
H
Health and Safety Information 207
Help
In-Device 97
Home screen 35
adding shortcuts 38
adding widgets 38
customizing 28
folders 39
primary shortcuts 37
wallpaper 39
I
Icons
Status Bar 35
Internet 98
IR
Smart Remote 17
L
Location settings
Google location services 177
Standalong GPS services 176
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
247
VZW location services 176
Lookout Security 99
M
Market
see Play Store 112
Memory Card
formatting 150, 151
installing 15
removing 15
Memory settings
internal phone storage 172
Menu
context-sensitive 29
Messages
creating and sending 70
email 74
Gmail 77
managing 71
settings 71
Talk 79
types 69
Messaging
Google Mail 92
Messenger 101
Mobile Hotspot
configuring 159
turning on or off 142
Mobile networks
settings 158
Mobile Web 98
Multi-Tasking
Watching Videos 129
Music 102
Adding Music 105
Creating a Playlist 105
Editing a Playlist 106
Making a Song a Ringtone 103
Options 103
Playing Music 102
Removing Music 105, 106
Share via Group Play 96
Simultaneoulsy Playback 96
Using Playlists 105
Music App
Music Application 111
Music File Extensions
3GP 102
AAC 102
AAC+ 102
eAAC+ 102
M4A 102
MP3 102
MP4 102
WMA 102
Music Files
Removing 106
Transferring 106
My Places 100
My Profile 49
sending 49
N
Namecards
sending 51
Navigation 29
command keys 37
touch gestures 29
New applications
Downloading 112
Non-Market Applications 114
Notification Panel 33
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
248
O
Operating Environment 224
Organizer
Calculator 84
World Clock 89
Other Important Safety
Information 229
P
Pairing with Bluetooth 144
Phone settings
Date & time 198
language 186
Picture-In-Picture 129
Pinning
Memo 82
Play Books 109
Play Store 112
Powering On and Off 12
R
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 210
Responsible Listening 222
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile device 228
Roaming 14
settings 158
rvice 125
S
S Note 116
S Translator
Translate Text 116
Translate Using Voice 116
S Voice 117
Using 117
Samsung Hub
Creating a New Account 119
Using 120
Samsung keyboard
configuring 41
entering text 41
Samsung Link
Configuring Settings 123
Definitions 122
Deregister Storage 125
Sharing Media 125
Web Storage Setup 124
Samsung Mobile Products and
Recycling 218
Scan for Nearby Devices 103
Scrapbook 126
Security
locking and unlocking 16
Security settings
credential storage 184
Setting an alarm 88
Settings 152
Share Videos 96
SketchBook for Galaxy 126
SkyDrive 124
Smart Alarm 89
Smart Practices While Driving 214
Smart Switch 17
Snooze 89
Repeat 88
Song
Set As 103
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)
Certification Information 212
Speed Dials
assigning 55
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
249
removing or reassigning 56
Split Screens
Group Play 96
Standard Limited Warranty 231
Storage
settings 172
SugarSync 124
Synchronization settings
background data 193
T
Task Manager 14
Text
entering 40
Text settings
default 186
Google voice typing 187
Samsung keyboard 187
Third-Party Applications
Uninstalling 114
Transferring Music Files 106
TTY Mode 13
Turning Your Phone On and Off 12
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 219
Uninstalling
Third-party applications 114
Unknown Sources 114
USB 3.0 17
Use GPS Satellites 100
Use Wireless Networks 100
V
Video
Picture-In-Picture 129
Sharing Videos 128
Voice Search 133
Voicemail
checking 78
setting up 78
Volume
key 21
VPN
adding 145
settings 162
W
Warranty Information 231
WatchON 134
Adding a New Room 138
Changing Channels 136
Configure Just For You 137
Customizing Your Remote 134
Initial Configuration 134
Locating Programs 136
Personalize 137
Settings 137
Using 136
Web 98
Widgets 38
Settings 126
Stopwatch 90
Wi-Fi
adding a connection manually 140
Mobile Hotspot 142
scanning and connecting 140
settings 153
turning on or off 139
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
250
Wi-Fi Direct
connecting to devices 141
turning on or off 141
Wireless Networking
Bluetooth 144
VPN 145
Wi-Fi 139
World Clock
DST Settings 90
By accessing this document, the recipient agrees and
acknowledges that all contents and information in this document (i) are confidential and proprietary information
of Samsung, (ii) shall be subject to the non-disclosure regarding project H and Project B, and (iii) shall not be
disclosed by the recipient to any third party. Samsung Proprietary and Confidential
Legal Notice
1. All functionality, descriptions, ideas, drawings, features, specifications and
other information provided in this document are (i) Samsung’s
proprietary and confidential information, (ii) subject to the non-disclosure
agreement regarding Project H and Project B, (iii) provided for discussion
purpose only, and (iv) shall not be disclosed by the recipient to any third
party.
2. Samsung reserves the right to make changes to this document, at any
time, without obligation on Samsung to provide notification of such
change.
3. Nothing in this document grants to the recipient any license or right in or
to information or materials provided in this document, or any intellectual
property therein. SAMSUNG PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL
4. THIS DOCUMENT AND ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN
ARE PROVIDED ON "AS IS" BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER IMPLIED OR EXPRESSED.